Sebring
OWNER’S MANUAL
2008
2008 Sebring
81-026-0804 First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2007 Chrysler LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
.............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
...............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
...............................81
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
................................... 165
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................. 259
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
...............................................351
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
............................................... 371
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
..................................................433
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
..........................................441
10
INDEX
....................................................................451
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
and various customer-oriented documents. You are
urged to read these publications carefully. Following the
instructions and recommendations in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 5
1
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures that could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not
read this entire manual you may miss important infor-
mation. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
INTRODUCTION 7
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys ..................12
▫ Ignition Key Removal ...................13
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................14
▫ Locking Doors With The Key ..............15
䡵 Sentry Key威 ...........................15
▫ Replacement Keys ......................16
▫ Sentry Key威 Programming ................17
▫ General Information ....................18
䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped .........18
▫ Rearming Of The System .................18
▫ To Arm The System .....................19
▫ To Disarm The System ...................19
䡵 Illuminated Entry System — If Equipped .......20
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped .........21
▫ To Unlock The Doors ...................22
▫ To Lock The Doors .....................24
▫ ToUnlatchTheTrunk ...................25
2
▫ Using The Express Down Windows Feature —
If Equipped ..........................25
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................25
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ........25
▫ Battery Replacement ....................25
▫ General Information ....................26
䡵 Remote Start System — If Equipped ..........27
▫ How To Use Remote Start ................28
䡵 Door Locks ............................29
▫ Manual Door Locks .....................29
▫ Power Door Locks .....................31
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System
(Rear Doors) ..........................33
䡵 Power Windows ........................34
▫ Power Window Switches .................34
▫ Auto Window Down — If Equipped .........35
▫ Auto Window Up— If Equipped ...........36
▫ Reset Auto Up ........................37
▫ Window Lockout Switch .................37
▫ Wind Buffeting ........................38
䡵 Trunk Lock And Release ...................38
䡵 Trunk Safety Warning .....................39
▫ Trunk Internal Emergency Release ..........40
䡵 Occupant Restraints ......................40
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................42
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .....47
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ....48
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Rear Seat Belts ........................48
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ...................48
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ..........................49
▫ BeltAlert威 Programming .................49
▫ Automatic Locking Mode ................50
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ............51
▫ Seat Belt Extender ......................51
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . .52
▫ Airbag System Components ...............53
▫ Front Seat Airbag Features ................53
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls .....59
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...............65
▫ Child Restraint ........................67
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations ...........78
䡵 SafetyTips ............................78
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................78
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
TheVehicle ..........................79
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ....................80
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
2
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
You can insert the double-sided keys into the locks with
either side up.
The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the
key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers
can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized
dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers
and keep them in a safe place.
Vehicle Key
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transaxle
Place the gear selector lever in PARK. Turn the ignition
switch to the ACC position, push the key and cylinder
inward, rotate the key to the LOCK position. Then
remove the key.
NOTE:
•
If you try to remove the key before you place the
selector lever in PARK, the key may become trapped
temporarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder. If this
occurs, rotate the key to the right slightly, then remove
the key as described. If a malfunction occurs, the
system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock
cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inop-
erable. The engine can be started and stopped, but the
key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either door will cancel this feature.
Ignition Key Positions
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
•
For vehicles equipped with EVIC, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi-
tion. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The
time for this feature is programmable. For details, refer
to “Key-Off Power Delay,” under “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4
of this manual.
WARNING!
NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE:
•
The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the
ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position.
•
With either front door open, and the key in the
ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Key-
less Entry (RKE) will not function.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locking Doors With The Key
There is only one external door lock cylinder which is
located in the driver’s door only.
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward. To unlock the door, turn the
key forward. See ”Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” of this manual for door lock
lubrication.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds
if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn
on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem
with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash
after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an
invalid key to start the engine. Either of these conditions
will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle ser-
viced as soon as possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
CAUTION!
Always remove Sentry Keys威 from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
•
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
•
Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass™ an additional Sentry Key威,
or any other transponder equipped components on the
same keychain will not cause a key-related (transpon-
der) fault unless the additional part is physically held
against the ignition key being used when starting the
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
will not cause interference with this system.
All of the keys provided with your vehicle have been
programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key威 has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
The PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro-
gramming procedure. This procedure consists of pro-
gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank
key is one which has never been programmed.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
authorized dealer.
Sentry Key姞 Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid Sentry Keys威 by performing the following proce-
dure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three
seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first
key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15
seconds. After ten seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60
seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete,
the indicator light will turn on again for three seconds
and then turn off.
The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Keyless Entry
Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro-
cedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威 contact your
authorized dealer for details.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-
tems memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting
your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro-
grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to your autho-
rized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm (VSA) system monitors the
doors and trunk for unauthorized entry and ignition
switch for unauthorized operation.
If something triggers the alarm, the system will signal for
about 18 minutes. For the first three minutes, the horn
will sound intermittently and the headlights, park lights,
taillights and the indicator light in the cluster will flash.
Then the exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes.
Rearming Of The System:
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after 3
minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes,
and then the system will rearm itself.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System:
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the doors by pressing the power door lock switch
or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
NOTE: The system will not arm if you lock the doors
with the manual door lock plungers.
3. The indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash
rapidly for 16 seconds. This shows that the system is
arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the
ignition switch is turned ON, or the power door locks are
unlocked in any manner, the system will automatically
disarm. After 16 seconds, the indicator light will flash
slowly. This shows that the system is fully armed.
NOTE:
•
During the 16–second arming period, if a door is
opened or the ignition switch is turned ON, the system
will automatically disarm.
•
Once armed, the system disables the unlock switch on
the driver door trim panel and passenger door trim
panel, the trunk release button on the instrument
panel, and the HomeLink威/Garage Door Opener (if
equipped).
To Disarm The System:
Either press the UNLOCK button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter or insert a valid sentry key into the
ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON/START
position.
NOTE:
•
The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the keyless entry transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
•
The system remains armed during trunk entry. Press-
ing the trunk button will not disarm the system. If
someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and
opens any door, the alarm will sound.
•
When the system is armed, the interior power door
lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The VSA system is designed to protect your vehicle;
however, you can create conditions where the system will
give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described
arming sequences has occurred, the system will arm
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you
remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will
sound. If this occurs, disarm the system.
If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes
disconnected the system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, the
horn will sound, and the ignition will not start the
vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system.
Tamper Alert
If the alarm was triggered, but the warning signals have
timed out, the park and taillights flash three times
(instead of the normal twice) when unlocking the vehicle
with a valid RKE transmitter to alert the driver.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy/reading lights will turn on when you use
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open
either door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting (if so
equipped). For details, refer to “Illumination Approach,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Fea-
tures),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
turned on.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the interior lights ON position (extreme top position).
•
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
downward position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, open
the trunk, or activate the PANIC alarm from distances a
maximum of 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held radio
transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
NOTE: Inserting the key into the ignition switch dis-
ables all buttons on the transmitter.
Vehicle Key
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
TO UNLOCK THE DOORS
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice to unlock all
doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system (if
equipped) will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the transmitter. To change the cur-
rent setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key Unlock,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than
ten seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter
with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Flash Lights With Lock
The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Flash Lights with
Lock,” under ⬙Personal Settings (Customer Program-
mable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual for
details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
transmitter for at least four seconds, but not longer than
ten seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button
while still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter
with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter. The
time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with EVIC. For details, refer to “Illuminated
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
Approach,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features), under “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual.
TO LOCK THE DOORS
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal.
Sound Horn with Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or off. To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with EVIC, refer to “Sound
Horn with Lock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4 of this manual
for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed transmitter
for at least four seconds, but not longer than ten seconds.
Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the
LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter with the
ignition in the LOCK position, and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the transmitter
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TO UNLATCH THE TRUNK
Press the TRUNK button on the transmitter two times to
unlatch the trunk.
USING THE EXPRESS DOWN WINDOWS
FEATURE — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door
windows at the same time. To use this feature, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter and then
immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until
the windows lower to the level desired or until they
lower completely.
USING THE PANIC ALARM
To turn the PANIC alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the PANIC alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the illuminated entry system (if
equipped) will turn on.
The PANIC alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: You may need to be close to the vehicle when
using the transmitter to turn off the PANIC alarm due to
the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.
PROGRAMMING ADDITIONAL TRANSMITTERS
Refer to SENTRY KEY威 “Sentry Key威 Programming.”
If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contact
your authorized dealer for details.
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
1. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat
blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves
together.
GENERAL INFORMATION
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Separating Transmitter Halves
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in the transmitter. The expected life of
batteries is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
REMOTE START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Remote start conveniently starts the engine from outside
the vehicle by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key
fob while maintaining security. The system has a targeted
range of up to 300 ft (91 m). The vehicle must be locked,
the deck lid and hood closed and the transmission gear
selector lever in PARK in order to start the engine using
the Remote Start button on the key fob.
NOTE: Remote start requires automatic transaxle
equipped vehicles.
Remote Start
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Shift the gear selector lever into PARK.
•
Doors closed.
•
Hood closed.
•
Trunk closed.
•
Hazard switch off.
•
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed).
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch.
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level.
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the Remote Start button on
the RKE transmitter twice. The engine will start
and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start
mode for a 15–minute cycle.
NOTE:
•
For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15–minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, within 15 minutes, insert the key into
the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON
position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position
in order to drive the vehicle.
To Turn Off The Engine While In Remote Start
Mode
Press and release the Remote Start button one time.
NOTE: To avoid inadvertent shut downs, the system
will disable the one-time press of the Remote Start button
for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start
request.
DOOR LOCKS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.
Manual Lock Plunger
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
severe personal injuries and death.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger
door panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by
your authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for
programming.
Power Door Lock Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
The Auto Unlock on Exit feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4
of this manual for details.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
then back to LOCK four times, ending up in the LOCK
position.
3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock On Exit feature in accor-
dance with local laws.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
(REAR DOORS)
The Rear Door Child-Protection Locks are located inside
the rear edge of the door. Insert the tip of the ignition key
or similar flat-bladed object into the lock and rotate
approximately one-quarter turn to the lock or unlock
position (as indicated by the stamped icons).
Child Lock Control
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down
the window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
POWER WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW SWITCHES
The control on the driver’s door has up-down switches
that give you fingertip control of all four power win-
dows.
Auto Power Window Switch
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
trim panel, which operates the passenger door window.
The window controls will operate when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or ACC position, and when
the accessory delay feature is active.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
AUTO WINDOW DOWN — IF EQUIPPED
The front window controls on the driver and passenger
door trim panels have an Auto Down feature. These
switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To cancel the Auto Down movement, operate the switch
either in the up or down direction and release the switch.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will
cancel this feature.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
For vehicles equipped with EVIC, the power window
switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either door will
cancel this feature. The time for this feature is program-
mable. For details, refer to “Key-Off Power Delay,” under
“Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)”
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4 of this manual.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
AUTO WINDOW UP— IF EQUIPPED
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To cancel the Auto Up movement, operate the switch
either in the up or down direction and release the switch.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
to stop.
NOTE: ANTI-PINCH PROTECTION
•
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove
the obstacle and use the window switch again to close
the window.
•
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
When the window is almost closed, there is no
anti-pinch protection. To avoid personal injury, be
sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects
from the window path before closing.
RESET AUTO UP
Anytime the vehicle battery goes dead, the Auto Up
function will be disabled. To reactivate the Auto Up
feature, pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lock button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
Window Lockout Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
Use the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) Transmitter to open the
trunk from outside the vehicle.
From inside the vehicle the trunk
lid can be released by pressing the
Trunk Release Button located next
to the steering wheel on the in-
strument panel. The transmission
must be in PARK before the
switch will operate.
NOTE: The gear selector lever must be in PARK for this
switch to operate.
To unlatch the trunk lid from outside the vehicle, press
and release the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter
two times.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
With the ignition ON, the word “deck” will display in
place of the odometer display indicating that the trunk is
open. The odometer display will reappear once the trunk
is closed or if the trip button is depressed.
With the key in the lock position or with the key out, the
word “deck” will display until the trunk is closed.
On EVIC-equipped vehicles, the words “Trunk Ajar” will
display.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
TRUNK INTERNAL EMERGENCY RELEASE
NOTE: As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emer-
gency Release lever is built into the trunk latching
mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked
inside the trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by
pulling on the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the
trunk latching mechanism.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. The following safety
features are standard on all vehicles:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
positions
•
Pretensioning and load-limiting retractors for the front
seat belts
•
Advanced multistage driver and new active-vent front
passenger airbags
•
New active-vent front passenger airbags
•
Knee Bolsters for front seat occupants
Interior Trunk Emergency Release
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
An energy absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
that span the front and second rows for sedans — if
equipped
•
Supplemental seat side (Thorax) airbags — if
equipped
•
Front seat belt retractors incorporate pretensioners to
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event.
•
All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat.
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-size
seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature also can
be used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
NOTE: The front airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on collision severity.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce
your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being
thrown out.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
WARNING!
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
Pulling Out the Latch Plate
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision,
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Positioning the Lap Belt
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push anchorage button to release the anchor-
age, and move it up or down to the position that serves
you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Rear Seat Belts
Three-point belts are nonadjustable for outboard and
center rear passengers on sedans. The center belt is
mounted to the rear shelf panel and exits through a bezel
in the panel.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
Adjustable Anchorage
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In addition, the front passenger seat belt includes a
two-stage load-limiting feature to enhance occupant pro-
tection for the same reason.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the front airbags, the
pretensioners are single use items. After a collision that is
severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners,
both must be replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert姞)
If the occupied driver’s seat belt has not been buckled
within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will
alert the driver to buckle their seat belt. The driver
should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their
seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, BeltAlert威 will
continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light
for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled.
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert姞 Programming
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by following these steps:
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. Chrysler does not recommend deac-
tivating BeltAlert威.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt partially each
time when unbuckling.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming.
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while
the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. However, the belt will still retract to remove any
slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode
is available on all passenger-seating positions. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is
installed in a passenger seating position. Children 12
years old and younger should be properly restrained in
the rear seat whenever possible.
How to Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender, and stow it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Front Airbag Components
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to
protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next
to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with window
bags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Airbag Light
•
Driver Airbag
•
Front Passenger Airbag
•
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
— If Equipped
•
Front Seat— side mounted (Thorax) Airbags — If
Equipped
•
Front Impact Sensors
•
Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Seat Belt Reminder Light
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners
Front Seat Airbag Features
The front airbag system has dual-stage driver and front
passenger airbags. This system provides output appro-
priate to the level of crash severity as determined by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) and the impact
sensors at the front of the car.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
the second stage determines whether the output force is
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the second stage is expended later in the crash
event.
Driver Airbag Special Features
Driver airbag deployment and force level is controlled by
the driver’s seat position as well as impact severity. Use
of special inflators, result in a very compact driver’s side
airbag.
In addition to the small size, the inflating gasses exit
through strategically placed vents, which direct the gas
away from the occupant.
Front Passenger Airbag Special Features
A new active venting front-passenger airbag is designed
to reduce the risk of occupants who may be out of
position by the use of active vents positioned on each
side of the airbag.
Supplemental Front Seat-Mounted Thorax Side
Airbags — If Equipped
Front seat-mounted side (Thorax) airbags provide en-
hanced protection and work together with supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to help protect
an occupant during a side impact. The seat-mounted side
airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the
outboard side of the seat.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each bag deploys
independently, that is a left side impact deploys the left
bag only and a right-side impact deploys only the right
bag.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Airbags offer side-impact protection to front and rear seat
outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the
body structure. Each airbag features inflated chambers
place adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that
reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The
curtains deploy downward, covering both windows on
the impact side.
seat-mounted Side Airbag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and
rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the side
bags during an impact severe enough to require airbag
occupant protection.
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are not there to protect you.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Location
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
window bags, do not stack luggage or other cargo
up high enough to block the location of the Side
Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC). The area
where the side curtain airbag is located should
remain free from any obstructions.
•
Do not attach cup holders or any other objects on
or around the door. The inflating side airbag could
drive the object into occupants, causing serious
injury.
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags, and side
airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the
side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in
moderate to severe side collisions. In certain types of
collisions, both the front and side airbags may be trig-
gered. However, even in collisions where the airbags
work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the right
position for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and younger should always
ride buckled up in a rear seat.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from one to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to the section on Child Restraint.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags
room to inflate.
4. If your vehicle has side Thorax airbags, do not lean
against the door as airbags will inflate forcefully into
the space between you and the door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ in Section 9 of this
manual.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
•
Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The Occupant Restraint Controller System (ORC) is
part of a Federally regulated safety system required for
this vehicle.
The ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe
enough to require the airbags to inflate. Based on the
sensor signals, a central electronic Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) deploys the front airbags, side inflat-
able airbag curtains (if equipped), seat-mounted side
(Thorax) airbags (if equipped), and front seat belt preten-
sioners as required for each type of impact.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START
or RUN positions. These include all of the items listed
above except the steering wheel and column, instrument
panel, and passenger knee bolsters. If the key is in the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition,
the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
will deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for six to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition is
first turned on. After the self-check, the Airbag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Airbag
Warning Light either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound if the light comes on again after
initial start up.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect you
in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
Impact Sensors
Two sensors, located on the front body structure, trigger
airbag deployment in direct frontal impacts and aid the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) in determining
appropriate response to frontal impact events. Additional
sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deploy-
ment and provide deployment verification.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Side Inflatable Curtain and Front seat-mounted
Airbags — If equipped
The Occupant Restraint Controller System (ORC) de-
ploys the side inflatable curtain and seat-mounted thorax
side airbags during collision with other vehicles and
during collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the vehicle — such as collisions with
poles, trees or similar objects.
It will deploy the side inflatable curtains and front seat
thorax mounted airbags only on the impact side of the
vehicle.
The front driver and passenger seat contain inflatable
side airbags to protect the occupant from impact injuries.
Correctly functioning front passenger seat components
are critical for the ORC to properly classify the front
passenger and calculate the proper airbag deployment.
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger
seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
•
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger
seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover in any
way.
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Al-
ways use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
•
Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
•
Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by Chrysler/Mopar威.
•
At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas-
tener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by Chrysler/Mopar威.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci-
dent. A modified vehicle may not comply with re-
quired Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment,
with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communication
network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced
Accident Response System performs the following func-
tions:
•
Cuts off fuel to the engine,
•
Flashes hazard lights,
•
Turns on the interior lights which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed,
•
Unlocks the doors automatically.
If Deployment Occurs
The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detect a moderate-
to-severe collision, to help restrain the driver and front
passenger, and then immediately deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision, which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
•
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
WARNING!
Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced
airbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
advanced airbag system service. If your seat includ-
ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced
in any way (including removal or loosening/
tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle
to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer ap-
proved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify an advanced airbag system for persons
with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. While
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
•
The AIRBAG light does not come on during the six to
eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned
on.
•
The light remains on after the six to eight second
interval.
•
The light comes on and remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
eters (see the following list) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near
deployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed
deceleration data during and/or after airbag deploy-
ment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler Corporation and others to learn more
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
Chrysler Corporation, such investigations may be re-
quested by customers, insurance carriers, government
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
associated with universities, and with hospital and insur-
ance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative), the com-
pany or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the US govern-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Corporation to any
third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
Corporation product.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
•
Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
•
⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
•
Impact acceleration and angle
•
Seat belt status
•
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
•
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
•
Engine control status (including engine speed)
•
Transmission gear selection
•
Cruise control status
•
Traction/stability control status
•
Tire pressure monitoring system status – if equipped
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
2
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
Infants and Small Children
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
system.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren)” in this section.
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, then the child should
use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child and booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
(Some booster seats are equipped with a front shield and
are held in the vehicle by the lap portion.)
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-
ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your
child restraints:
•
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt
in a rear seat.
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
•
All passenger seating positions contain automatic
locking retractors. However, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and
pull it tight if necessary.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
NOTE: For additional information, refer online to
www.seatcheck.org.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. The outboard rear seating
positions have lower anchorages that are capable of
accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats having
flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child
seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in
the outboard positions only. Regardless of the specific
type of lower attachment, NEVER install LATCH-
compatible child seats such that two seats share a com-
mon lower anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating
positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehi-
cle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you must use
the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If your child
restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only in-
stall the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Please refer to “Installing the Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
2
Rear Seat LATCH Anchors
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
Rear Seat LATCH Anchors
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
were provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars,
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
2
window. These tether strap anchorages are under a
plastic cover with this symbol on it.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seat cover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor-
age, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the
most direct path between the anchor and the child
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seat backs as you remove slack in
the strap.
•
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraint Tether Strap
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
1— Cover A—Tether Strap Hook
3— Attaching Strap B—Tether Anchor
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
2
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint
to the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic
Locking Retractors (ALRs), which are designed to keep
the lap portion tight around the child restraint.
The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in
order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed.
Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode” in this section for
details. A locking clip should not be necessary once the
automatic locking feature is enabled. Position the shoul-
der and lap belt on the child restraint. The Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) is activated by first attaching
the child seat, then pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor, then allowing the webbing to retract. As the
webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking
Mode. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by
depressing the button, and allow the webbing to retract
into the retractor.
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Make sure that:
•
The child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
2
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this manual.
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
If you are required to drive with the deck lid open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the LED is not lit during starting, have it
checked. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
2
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
NOTE: If the defrost feature is not functioning, the
cause should be located and corrected immediately by an
authorized service center. The windshield could fog up
while driving and obscure your visibility.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. In addition, if
gasoline fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid,
transmission fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the
cause should be located and corrected immediately.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors ...............................85
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ......85
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ....86
▫ Electric Remote-Control Mirrors ............87
▫ Adjusting Sideview Mirrors ...............88
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ....89
䡵 Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)—
If Equipped ............................89
▫ Operation ............................91
▫ Phone Call Features ....................98
▫ UConnect威 System Features ..............101
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ............105
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
UConnect威 System ....................107
▫ General Information ...................116
䡵 Voice Recognition System (VR) — If Equipped . . 116
▫ Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation ....116
▫ Commands ..........................117
3
▫ VoiceTraining........................120
䡵 Seats ................................121
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments ...........121
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped ..............124
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints ..............125
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped .............126
▫ Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat ............127
▫ Folding Rear Seat .....................128
▫ Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest ..........129
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood .............130
䡵 Lights ...............................131
▫ Map/Reading/Interior Lights ............131
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights .............................132
▫ Automatic Headlight System — If Equipped . . 133
▫ Headlight Time Delay ..................133
▫ Passing Light / Flash To Pass .............134
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped .........................134
▫ Lights On Reminder ...................134
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............134
▫ Turn Signals .........................135
▫ Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch .........136
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers ............136
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............138
▫ Mist Feature .........................139
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With Auto
Headlights Only) .....................139
▫ Windshield Washers ...................140
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................140
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ...........140
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ......141
▫ Electronic Speed Control Operation ........142
▫ To Activate ..........................142
▫ To Set At The Desired Speed .............143
▫ To Deactivate ........................143
▫ To Resume Speed .....................143
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............143
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............144
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped .........144
▫ Programming HomeLink威 ...............146
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming .....148
▫ Using HomeLink威 .....................149
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威
Button .............................149
▫ Security ............................150
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................150
▫ General Information ...................150
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped .............151
▫ Opening Sunroof - Manual ..............152
▫ Opening Sunroof - Express ..............152
▫ Closing Sunroof - Manual ...............152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
3
▫ Venting Sunroof - Express ...............153
▫ Closing Sunroof - Express ...............153
▫ Auto Sunroof (Express) With Anti–Pinch
Protection — If Equipped ...............153
▫ Sunshade Operation ...................153
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................153
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................154
▫ Ignition Off Operation ..................154
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets ..................154
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off .......156
䡵 Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver —
If Equipped ...........................156
▫ Cupholder Ash Receiver — If Equipped .....156
䡵 Console Features .......................157
▫ Console Features ......................157
䡵 Cupholders ...........................160
▫ Heated Or Cooled Cupholder —
If Equipped .........................160
▫ Rear Bottle Holders ....................161
䡵 Storage ..............................162
▫ CargoArea..........................162
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
INSIDE DAY/NIGHT MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Adjusting Rear View Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
3
AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
This mirror will automatically adjust for annoying head-
light glare from vehicles behind you. Push in the button
on the face of the mirror to activate the dimming feature.
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
1 - Auto Mirror Sensor
4 - Passenger Map Light
Switch
2 - Driver Map Light Switch 5 - Auto Mirror ON LED
3 - Auto Mirror On/Off Switch
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
ELECTRIC REMOTE-CONTROL MIRRORS
Both of the outside mirrors can be adjusted by using the
remote controls mounted on the driver’s door panel.
The rotary knob has three separate positions: L for the
Left mirror; O for Off; and R for the Right mirror.
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. When finished,
return the knob to the center Off position to guard
against accidentally moving a mirror position.
Power Mirror Adjust Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
3
ADJUSTING SIDEVIEW MIRRORS
Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the right side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your right
side mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this
convex mirror.
Mirror Directions
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect姞)—
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code RER radio contains an inte-
grated Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威) sys-
tem. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
UConnect威 system operating instructions for this radio.
UConnect威 is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. UConnect威 allows you to dial a
phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect威 system.
NOTE: The UConnect威 system requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the UConnect威 website for
supported phones.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
3
NOTE: For UConnect威 customer support, visit the
following websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
UConnect威 allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The UConnect威 phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names, with four numbers per name. Each language has
a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Hands-Free profile” cellular phone. UConnect威 features
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so UConnect威 works
no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is
turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
UConnect威 system. The UConnect威 system allows up to
seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)
that will enable you to access the system.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with radio.
The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The UConnect威 system can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
UConnect威 website for supported phones. If your cellu-
lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnect威
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect威 system is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect威 system
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect威 system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect威
system and to navigate through the UConnect威 menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect威 system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
3
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
UConnect威 system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The UConnect威 system will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect威 system from idle, simply press
the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect威 system sessions begin with a
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect威 System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect威 system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
UConnect威 website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following are general phone to UConnect威 system
pairing instructions:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect威 system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, with 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect威 system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect威 system. The priority allows the
UConnect威 system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect威
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙ in this section).
Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
3
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙ The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. Based on the country in which the ve-
hicle was purchased, the UConnect威 system limits the
user from dialing an invalid combination of numbers.
For example, in the U.S., 234-567-890 is nine digits
long, which is not a valid U.S. phone number - the
closest valid phone number has 10 digits.
•
The UConnect威 system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnect威 phonebook.
To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer
to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect威 Phonebook,⬙ in
this section.
•
The UConnect威 system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the phonebook is recom-
mended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or
⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙⬙Work,⬙⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect威 system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Phonebook Download
UConnect威 allows the user to download entries from
their phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
PHONE button and say “Phonebook Download.” The
system prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phone-
book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
NOTE:
•
The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
3
•
Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the UConnect威 system, and then send the address
book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetooth威 connection.
•
If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit Entries in the UConnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Editing names in the phonebook is recom-
mended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete Entries in the UConnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the “Voice Recognition” button
while the UConnect威 system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the name, the UConnect威 system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect威 Phonebook
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
•
The UConnect威 system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
3
List All Names in the UConnect威 Phonebook
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
•
The UConnect威 system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the “Voice
Recognition” button during the playing of the desired
name, and say ⬙Call.⬙
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
•
The UConnect威 system will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect威 system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect威 system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect威 system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject
the call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the PHONE button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The UConnect威 system compatible phones in
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming
call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user
can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the “Voice Recognition” button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ⬙Toggling Between Calls⬙ in this section. To combine
two calls, refer to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
3
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the “Voice Recogni-
tion” button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under ⬙Making a Second
Call While Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call
has established, press and hold the PHONE button until
you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
•
The UConnect威 system will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
UConnect威 system.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
UConnect威 system after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnect威 system either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the UConnect威 system and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnect威 system for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the UConnect威 system to the mobile phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
UConnect姞 System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect威 system is
using:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect威 language change opera-
tion, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect威 system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
3
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect威 system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is only supported in the U.S.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S.
and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service and
area.
The UConnect威 system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnect威 system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations, when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect威 system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
City in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-
age details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect威 system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UConnect威 system to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the UConnect威
system.
When calling a number with your UConnect威 system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can press
the “Voice Recognition” button and say the sequence you
wish to enter, followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
4 6 #), you can press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, ⬙3746#Send.⬙ Saying a number, or sequence of
numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is also to be used for
navigating through an automated customer service cen-
ter menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored UConnect威 phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The UConnect威 system will then
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
3
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations; this is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect威 sys-
tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect威 system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect威 system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect威. The status is given for roaming, net-
work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect威 system (while dial-
ing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect威 system will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect威 system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off)
When you mute the UConnect威 system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect威 system:
•
Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the UConnect威 system:
•
Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
•
Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect威 system allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect威 system
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your UConnect威 paired cellular phone to the
UConnect威 system or vice versa, press the “Voice Recog-
nition” button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
3
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect威 System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a UConnect威 paired cellular phone
and the UConnect威 system, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•
When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
•
The UConnect威 system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the “Voice Recogni-
tion” button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the
next two sections for an alternate way to “select” or
“delete” a paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the UConnect威 system.
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button at
any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
UConnect威 system will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft [9 m]) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect威 Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the PHONE button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button at
any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect姞
System
UConnect威 Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
PHONE button and say “UConnect威 Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect威
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the UConnect威 mode (e.g., from radio
mode):
•
Press and hold the “Voice Recognition” button for five
seconds until the session begins, or,
•
Press the “Voice Recognition” button and say the
⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
3
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect威 system. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched OFF.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect威 phonebook.
•
The UConnect威 phonebook nametag recognition rate
is optimized for the person who stored the name in the
phonebook.
•
You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the drivers seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect威 system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
3
•
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the UConnect威 system. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be re-established by switching the
phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
3
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
UConnect威 Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
3
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) — IF
EQUIPPED
Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation
This Voice Recognition System allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: In a stressful situation, take care to speak into
the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as
possible. The ability of the Voice Interface System to
recognize user voice commands may be negatively af-
fected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions and all attention should be
kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may
result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
When you press the VR hard-key, you will hear a beep.
The beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the VR hard-key, listen for the beep, and
say your command.
Pressing the VR hard-key while the system is speaking is
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted
and you can add or change commands. This will become
helpful once you start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words CANCEL,
HELP, or MAIN MENU.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the VR hard-key
and say HELP or MAIN MENU.
Commands
The Voice Recognition System understands two types of
commands. Global commands are available at all times.
Local commands are available if the supported radio
mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key.
2. Say a command (e.g., HELP).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
3
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the voice recognition
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for VR
is different then the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key. You may
say MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
RADIO (to switch to the radio mode)
•
DISC (to switch to the disc mode)
•
MEMO (to switch to the memo recorder)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave - if equipped)
To switch to the AM band say AM or RADIO AM. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
•
FREQUENCY (to change the frequency)
•
NEXT STATION (to select the next station)
•
PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)
•
RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
•
MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band say FM or RADIO FM. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
•
FREQUENCY (to change the frequency)
•
NEXT STATION (to select the next station)
•
PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)
•
RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
•
MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode say SAT or SATELLITE
RADIO. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
CHANNEL NUMBER (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•
NEXT CHANNEL (to select the next channel)
•
PREVIOUS CHANNEL (to select the previous chan-
nel)
•
LIST CHANNEL (to hear a list of available channels)
•
SELECT NAME (to say the name of a channel)
•
RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
•
MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode say DISC. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
TRACK (#) (to change the track)
•
NEXT TRACK (to play the next track)
•
PREVIOUS TRACK (to play the previous track)
•
MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode say MEMO. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
•
NEW MEMO (to record a new memo) — During the
recording you may press the VR hard-key to stop
recording. You continue by saying one of the following
commands:
−
SAVE (to save the memo)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
3
−
CONTINUE (to continue recording)
−
DELETE (to delete the recording)
•
PLAY MEMOS (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the VR hard-
key to stop playing memos. You continue by saying
one of the following commands:
−
REPEAT (to repeat a memo)
−
NEXT (to play the next memo)
−
PREVIOUS (to play the previous memo)
−
DELETE (to delete a memo)
•
DELETE ALL (to delete all memos)
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR
hard-key first and wait for the beep, before speaking the
“barge in” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect威
system Voice Training feature may be used.
1. Press the VR hard-key, speak “System Setup” and once
you are in that menu then speak “Voice Training.” This
will train your own voice to the system and will improve
recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect威 System. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched OFF. This procedure may be repeated with a
new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice
only.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
Forward/Rearward
The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat,
near the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat
forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in
the position desired. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
3
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster — If
Equipped
A lever style height adjustment feature enhances comfort
for petite as well as tall drivers. A lever with a ratcheting
mechanism, located on the outboard side of the seat,
raises and lowers it. Total travel is 2.2 in (56 mm).
Manual Seat Height Adjustment Lever
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Bucket Seats
The recliner control is on the side of the seat. To recline,
lean forward slightly before lifting the lever, then lean
back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean
forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its
normal position.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Seatback Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The control lever is located
on the outboard side of the driver’s seatback. Turn the
control lever downward to increase and upward to
decrease the desired amount of lumbar support.
Power Seats — If Equipped
The power seat switches are on the outboard side of the
seat near the floor. Use the front switch to move the seat
up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat. The rear
switch controls the seatback recliner.
Lumbar Support
Power Seat Switches
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjust the restraints so
that the upper edge is as high as practical. To raise, pull
up on the head restraint. To lower, depress the button on
the post guide and push down on the head restraint.
Adjustable Head Restraint
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
3
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats leather or cloth front driver and
passenger seats. The controls for the heated seats are
located in the center console above the climate controls.
There are indicator lights in the switches, which indicate
a low heat setting (one light lit) or high heat setting (two
lights lit).
Press the switch once to select high-level heating. Press
the switch a second time to select low-level heating. Press
the switch a third time to shut off the heating elements.
Heated Seat Switches
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat
The recline handle on the front passenger seat also
releases the seatback to fold forward.
Seatback Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
3
The hard seatback features a work surface and a molded
rim for retaining items stored on the seatback panel.
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull on the loops shown in the picture
to fold down either or both seatbacks.
When returning the rear seatback to the upright position,
be sure the seatback is latched.
Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat
Folding Rear Seats
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The rear cargo area of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position)
should not be used as a play area by children. They
could be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest
The rear seat is equipped with a folding armrest with
cupholders.
Folding Rear Seat Armrest
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
3
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
Then lift the secondary latch located under the front edge
of the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
Hood Release Lever
Hood Safety Catch
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
on the left underside of the hood.
Before closing the hood, make sure to stow the prop rod
in its proper location. To prevent possible damage, do not
slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at
the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
LIGHTS
Map/Reading/Interior Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rear view mirror. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the button. Press the button a second time to turn the
light OFF. The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off
Hood Prop Rod Hole Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3
automatically. Interior lighting also comes on when a
door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully
upward, past the second detent.
There is a second light located midway back in the
headliner.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. This includes the glove box light,
but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation,
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights
Turn the end of the Multifunction Control Lever to the
first detent for parking light operation. Turn to the
second detent for headlight operation. Turn to the third
detent “A” for “Auto” headlight operation (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the Multifunction Control
Lever up or down.
Automatic Headlight System — If Equipped
Turning the end of the Multifunction Control Lever to the
third detent, “A” (Auto), will activate the automatic
headlight system.
With the engine running and the Multifunction Control
Lever in the “A” (Auto) position, the headlights will turn
on and turn off based on the surrounding light levels.
Headlight Time Delay
There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle
lights for 30, 60, or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned OFF. To activate the headlight delay, the Multi-
function Control Lever must be rotated to the “Off”
position after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Only the
headlights will illuminate during this time. Refer to
“EVIC- Customer Programmable Features” in Section 4
to turn this feature “On/Off” or set the time interval.
Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
3
Passing Light / Flash to Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multifunction Control Lever toward
you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high
beam and remain on until the lever is released.
NOTE: If the Multifunction Control Lever is held in the
flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high
beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the
next flash to pass operation.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The high beam lights will come on as DRL at DRL
intensity (lower), whenever the ignition is on, the engine
is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking brake
is off, the turn signal is off, and the gear select lever is in
any position except PARK.
NOTE: On this vehicle, the DRLwill automatically turn
off when the turn signal is in operation and automatically
turn back on when the turn signal is not operating.
Lights On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the Multifunction
Control Lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights
and pull out the end of the control lever.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The front fog lights will only operate with the
headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights
will turn off the front fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the Multifunction Control Lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
Front Fog Light Control
Turn Signal Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is
defective.
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Push the Multifunction Control Lever away from you to
switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the Lever
toward you, to switch the headlights back to Low beam.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
Highbeam Functions
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent past the
intermittent settings for Low-speed wiper operation, or
to the second detent past the intermittent settings for
High-speed wiper operation.
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the
PARK position if you turn off the ignition switch while
they are operating. The wipers will resume operation
when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position
again.
CAUTION!
•
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than OFF.
•
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
OFF position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned OFF and the blades cannot return to the
OFF position, damage to the wiper motor may
occur.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi-
tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the Wind-
shield Wiper/Washer Control Lever to the first detent,
and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired
delay interval. There are five delay settings, which allow
you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one
cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18
seconds between cycles.
For vehicles equipped with the Speed Sensitive Intermit-
tent Wiper System, the wiper delay times depend on
vehicle speed. If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will double.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during wind-
shield washer use.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
Headlights with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn ON
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the Multifunction Control Lever (on the left side of the
steering column) is placed in the A AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn OFF when the wipers
are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or
off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped. For details, refer to ”Headlights
with Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center” in Section 4 of this manual.
Mist Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
3
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the Windshield Wiper/Washer
Control lever toward you and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low speed for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the OFF position, the wipers will operate for two wipe
cycles and then turn OFF.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located
in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water. Refer to the appropriate engine diagram
in Section 7 “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the location
of the reservoir.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle inward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
Tilt / Telescoping Steering Wheel Lock
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OPERATION
The Speed Control Lever is located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
TO ACTIVATE:
Push in and release the ON/OFF button located in the end
of the Electronic Speed Control Lever. The Speed Control
indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn
the system OFF, push in and release the ON/OFF button a
second time. The Speed Control indicator will turn off. The
system should be turned OFF when not in use.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control System will auto-
matically turn itself off when the ignition key is turned to
the LOCK position.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
Speed Control Location
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO SET AT THE DESIRED SPEED:
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push
down on the lever and release SET DECEL. The vehicle
will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
•
The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph (40
km/h) for the speed control to set.
•
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and
on level ground before pushing downthe SET DECEL
lever.
TO DEACTIVATE:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the speed control
lever toward you CANCEL, or normal brake pressure
while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed control
without erasing the set speed memory. Pushing in the
ON/OFF button (in the end of the lever) or turning off
the ignition switch erases the set speed memory.
TO RESUME SPEED:
To resume a previously set speed, push upward on the
RESUME ACCEL lever and release. Resume can be used
at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING:
When the speed control is ON, speed can be increased by
pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL. Release the
lever when the desired speed is reached, and the new
speed will be set.
Pushing up and quickly releasing the RESUME ACCEL
lever will result in a 1 mph (2 km/h) speed increase. Each
time the lever is pushed upwards and quickly released.
To decrease speed while speed control is ON, push down
and hold SET DECEL. Release the lever when the desired
speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
3
Pushing down the SET DECEL button once will result in
a 1 mph (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
pushed, speed decreases.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
TO ACCELERATE FOR PASSING:
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control on Hills
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
channels.
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door
opener without these safety features. Call toll-free
1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
HomeLink威 Buttons
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
3
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the hand-held transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1–3 in (3-8 cm) away
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威
and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds, or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you train.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
Some gate operators and garage door openers may
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
•
After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the ga-
rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, and
then turns to a constant light, continue with program-
ming for a Rolling Code.
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
3
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener 2 — Training Button
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink威” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink威
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
Security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc. The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To re-program a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
3
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
ming Homelink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
•
Press the “Learn” button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
tions were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof controls are mounted between the sun visors
in the Dome/Reading Lamp.
Power Sunroof Switch
1 - Left Interior Light 3 - ATC Sensor - If Equipped
2 - Power Sunroof Switch 4 - Right Interior Light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
3
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In an accident, there is greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof - Manual
Press the switch rearward and hold, and the sunroof will
open automatically from any position. The sunroof will
open fully, then stop automatically. During this opera-
tion, any release of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
Opening Sunroof - Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof - Manual
To close the sunroof from an open or vent position, press
and hold the switch forward. The sunroof will close fully
and stop automatically. Release the switch to stop sun-
roof travel at any point.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent.
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully, then stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Auto Sunroof (Express) With Anti–Pinch
Protection — If Equipped
During express closing, anytime an obstacle that restricts
glass movement is detected, the motor will stop and
reverse travel to avoid pinching the object.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if so equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. For
details, refer to “Key-Off Power Delay,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Sec-
tion 4 of this manual.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are two 12-volt electrical outlets on this vehicle.
Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.
The instrument panel power outlet, located below the
climate control knobs, has power available only when the
ignition is on. This outlet will also operate a conventional
cigar lighter unit.
NOTE: If desired, the instrument panel power outlet
can be converted by your authorized dealer to provide
power with the ignition switch while in the LOCK
position.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console power outlet is powered directly from
the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged
into this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent
engine starting.
Instrument Panel Power Outlet Console Interior
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
3
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED
Cupholder Ash Receiver — If Equipped
An optional ash receiver is available from your autho-
rized dealer and will fit in the center console front
cupholder.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
For vehicles equipped with the heated and cooled
cupholder, locate the cup holder ash receiver in the
forward cupholder.
The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter.
You may use the power outlet, located in the instrument
panel below the climate control knobs, or in the bottom of
the console compartment, for this cigar lighter.
CONSOLE FEATURES
Console Features
The center console armrest slides forward from design
position to provide added user comfort. Two cupholders
can accommodate large sized fast food beverage contain-
ers, and 20 oz (500 ml) bottles. A one-piece cup holder
insert for both cavities can easily be removed for clean-
ing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
3
Dual Storage Bins
Lifting a latch at the front of the hinged armrest provides
access to these storage areas.
1. The left latch opens to the top storage area.
2. The lower bin can be accessed directly, without first
exposing the upper bin, by operating the right latch with
the armrest down.
3. The first storage bin can be used to hold smaller items.
4. The lower storage bin includes a molded-in coin
holder, room for CDs, DVDs, and a power outlet that
allows a cell phone to recharge while concealed.
NOTE: A notch in the side of the console base under the
armrest will also allow use of cell phone while still
plugged into the power outlet and with the armrest
latched down.
NOTE: The power outlet located inside the console can
also energize the cigar lighter in the available Smoker’s
Package.
1 — Release Top Compartment 3 — Top Compartment
2 — Release Bottom Compart-
ment
4 — Bottom Compartment
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Video Console — If Equipped
The optional VES™(Video Entertainment System) in-
cludes the following components:
•
The screen for a rear seat DVD player is stored under
the armrest.
•
Remote Control
•
Audio/Video RCA Jacks
See Section Four, “Video Entertainment System-If
Equipped,” of this manual, for further information.
Video Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
3
CUPHOLDERS
Heated Or Cooled Cupholder — If Equipped
With this feature the rear cavity of the cupholder can
keep cool beverages cool, and hot beverages hot. The rear
cupholder heats to 140°F (60°C) or cools to 35°F (1.6°C).
The switch is located on the front of the center console
and has three positions: HEAT, OFF, COOL.
When the unit is on and the LED is Red, the cup holder
is being heated. When the LED is Blue, the cup holder is
being cooled.
Heated or Cooled Cupholder
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Make sure the beverage container can withstand the
temperatures shown above, when using the Cooled
or Heated Cupholder.
Rear Bottle Holders
There are built-in bottle holders located in both rear door
trim panels.
Rear Bottle Holder
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-
ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
STORAGE
CARGO AREA
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
•
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback in not securely locked
into position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
•
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
•
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve-
hicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features .................169
䡵 Base Instrument Cluster ..................170
䡵 Premium Instrument Cluster ...............171
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions ............172
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) –
If Equipped ...........................183
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays............................184
▫ Oil Change Required ...................185
▫ Trip Functions .......................186
▫ Compass Display .....................187
▫ Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features) ...........................190
䡵 Setting The Analog Clock .................193
䡵 Radio General Information ................193
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals .................193
▫ Two Types Of Signals ..................193
▫ Electrical Disturbances ..................193
▫ AM Reception .......................194
4
▫ FM Reception ........................194
䡵 Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) ................194
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......195
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ..................200
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............203
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) .......205
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) .......205
䡵 Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And
6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) ..................207
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......207
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) ....215
▫ NotesOnPlayingMP3/WMAFiles ........217
▫ List Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ..........220
▫ Info Button
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ..........220
䡵 Sales Code REN — Multimedia System —
If Equipped ...........................222
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
(If Equipped) ........................223
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped) ...............223
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威) (If Equipped) . . . 224
▫ Clock Setting Procedure.................224
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Sales Code RER — Multimedia System —
If Equipped ...........................225
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio .....227
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威) (If Equipped) . . . 227
▫ Clock Setting Procedure.................227
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) —
If Equipped ...........................229
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Device ............230
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using Radio Buttons . . . 230
▫ Play Mode ..........................230
▫ List Or Browse Mode ..................232
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped
(REN/REQ/RER/RES Radios Only) .........234
▫ System Activation .....................234
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID) ....................234
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode .................235
▫ Satellite Antenna ......................235
▫ Reception Quality .....................235
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode ......236
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(If Equipped) ........................238
▫ Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES威) (If Equipped) .............238
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . 238
▫ Radio Operation ......................239
▫ CD Player ..........................239
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
4
䡵 Video Entertainment System (VES)威 —
If Equipped ...........................240
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ........242
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance ...............242
䡵 Climate Controls .......................243
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating
System .............................243
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped .........................248
▫ Operating Tips .......................254
䡵 Rear Window Features ...................258
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster —
If Equipped .........................258
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 6 — Radio 11 — Storage Compartment
2 — Side Window Demister Outlet 7 — Passenger Airbag 12 — Climate Control
3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Glove Box 13 — Trunk Release Switch
4 — Ignition Switch 9 — Heated Seat Switch*
5 — Analog Clock 10 — Hazard Switch * If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
4
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is
located on the left side of the vehicle.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading below the red area of the
gauge shows that the engine cooling system is
operating properly. The gauge pointer may show a
higher than normal temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, in heavy stop and go
traffic, or when towing a trailer.
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
4. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level drops to two gal (7.6 L), the fuel
symbol will light and a single chime will sound.
6. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on briefly when
the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a
bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s electrical devices,
such as the Fog Lights or Rear Defroster. If the Charging
System Light remains on, it means that the vehicle is
experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain
SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your local authorized
dealer.
7. Airbag Light
The light comes on and remains on for six to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light does not
come on during starting, stays on, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
8. Theft Alarm Light — If Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the
alarm system is arming. The light will begin to flash
slowly indicating that the system is armed.
9. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will come on for about six seconds. A chime
will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt
out of the retractor. This is a reminder to “buckle up.” If
you do not buckle up, the light will remain on.
10. Oil Pressure Light
Shows low engine oil pressure. The light will come
on and remain on when the ignition switch is
turned from the OFF to the ON position, and the light
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
4
will turn off after the engine is started. If the bulb does
not come on during starting, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.
This can be determined using the procedure shown in
Section 7.
11. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If the engine is critically hot, a warning chime
will sound 10 times. After the chime turns off, the
engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out.
12. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (rpm x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
13. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transaxle gear
selection.
14. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. U.S. federal regulations require that upon
transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the
purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed
during repair or replacement, be sure to keep a record of
the reading before and after the service so that the correct
mileage can be determined.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
release the Trip Odometer button. To reset a trip odom-
eter, display the desired trip odometer to be reset then
push and hold the button until the display resets (ap-
proximately two seconds). Refer to “Trip Odometer But-
ton” for additional information.
Vehicle Warning Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, “DOOR AJAR,”
“TRUNK AJAR,” or “gASCAP” will display in the odom-
eter.
NOTE: If the instrument cluster is equipped with the
optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
then all warnings including “DOOR AJAR” and
“TRUNK AJAR” will only display in the EVIC. (Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in this
section for specific messages).
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change
in the evaporative system, or the fuel filler cap is loose,
improperly installed, or damaged, the words “gASCAP”
will display in the odometer. If this occurs, tighten the
fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset
button to turn off the “gASCAP” message. (Refer to
“Onboard Diagnostic System — OBDII” in Section 7 of
this manual for more information). If the problem con-
tinues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle
is started. See your authorized dealer service center as
soon as possible.
Change Oil
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
4
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset
the oil change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance) perform the following proce-
dure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
15. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Speed Control
System is ON.
16. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Knob
Single Trip Odometer
Press and release this button to change the display from
odometer to trip odometer. The word “Trip” displays to
show that the odometer is in Trip Mode. Press and release
the button again to change the display back to the
odometer.
To reset the trip odometer, first set the display to Trip
Mode. Then push and hold the button (approximately
two seconds) until the display resets to 0. The odometer
must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Dual Trip Odometer — If Equipped
Press and release this button to change the display from
odometer to “Trip A.” Press and release it a second time
to change the display to “Trip B.” Press and release it a
third time to change the display back to the odometer.
To reset the trip odometer, first display the trip mileage
that you want to reset, “Trip A” or “Trip B.” Then push
and hold the button (approximately two seconds) until
the display resets to zero. The odometer must be in Trip
Mode to reset the trip odometer.
17. Electronic Throttle Control Indicator Light
This red illuminated light informs you of a
problem with the Electronic Throttle Control
system. If a problem is detected, the light will
come on while the engine is running. If the
light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle
will usually be drivable and not need towing, however
see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running you
may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and
increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may
require towing. Immediate service is required.
The light will come on when the ignition switch is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. This is
normal. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
18. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
ditions, and do not switch off the ESP, or TCS — if
equipped.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
4
19. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system (if equipped).
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
20. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
turn signal, when using the turn signal lever.
21. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows when the front fog lights are ON.
22. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
The yellow ESP/BAS malfunction indicator
light will turn on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position. The light should go
out with the engine running. If the light re-
mains on after several ignition cycles, and you have
driven the vehicle several miles/kilometers at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the ESP is synchro-
nized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
23. Anti-Lock Warning Light (ABS)
This light monitors the ABS. This light will
come on when the ignition key is turned to the
ON position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
4
is not functioning and that service is required, however,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not
on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
Brakes.
The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to
assure that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key
to the on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light
should come on. If the light does not come on, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
24. Tire Pressure Monitor Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
4
(Refer to “Tire Inflation Pressures” under “Tires — Gen-
eral Information” and to “Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS)” in Section 5 of this manual for more informa-
tion).
25. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
called OBD that monitors emissions, engine, and
automatic transaxle control systems. The light
will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when
turning the key from LOCK/OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the
engine is running, serious conditions may exist that
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
26. High Beam Indicator
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Push the turn signal lever away from the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low
beam.
27. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display—Premium Cluster Only
This display shows the EVIC messages when the appro-
priate conditions exist. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in this section for more informa-
tion.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) – IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display. It is located in the lower
left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine tem-
perature gauges. The EVIC consists of the following:
•
System status
•
Vehicle information warning message displays
•
Personal settings (customer programmable features)
•
Compass heading display (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE,
SW)
•
Outside temperature display (°F or °C)
•
Trip computer functions
•
Audio mode displays – 12 preset Radio Stations or CD
Title and Track number when playing
•
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) displays (if
equipped)
EVIC Display Location
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
4
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons on the instrument panel
switch bank:
Press and release the MENU button to advance
the display to Trip Functions or Personal set-
tings or to return to the default System status
display.
Press and release the STEP button to advance
the display through the various Trip Functions
or Personal settings.
Press and release the COMPASS button to
display the compass heading and the outside
temperature.
Press and release the RESET button to accept a
selection. The RESET button also resets various
Trip Functions.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
•
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
•
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
MENU
Button
STEP
Button
COM-
PASS
Button
RESET
Button
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) Battery Low (with a
single chime)
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not In
PARK.
•
Left/Right Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph / 1 km h)
•
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
•
Headlights On
•
Key In Ignition
•
Speed Too High (with a single chime)
•
Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indica-
tor system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
perform the following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
4
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Distance To Empty
•
Elapsed Time
•
Display Units of Measure in
Press and release the STEP button to advance the display
through the Trip Functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion:
•
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read,
RESET or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history
information will be erased, and the averaging will con-
tinue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the RESET
button.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE display value.
•
When the DTE value is less than 30 mi (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will
change to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL. This display
will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding
a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.
•
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
in the ON or START position.
•
Display Units In:
To make your selection, press and release the RESET
button until U.S. or METRIC appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently
displayed. Press and hold the RESET button once to clear
the function currently displayed.
To reset all resettable functions, press and release the
RESET button a second time within three seconds of
resetting the currently displayed function (Reset ALL will
display during this three second window).
Compass Display
The compass heading indicates the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
compass button to display one of eight com-
pass heading and the outside temperature.
COM-
PASS
Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
4
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to calibrate the compass manually. When the ve-
hicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the
EVIC will flash the “CAL” indicator until the compass is
calibrated. You may calibrate the compass by completing
one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free from large
metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate, or abnormal,
you may wish to calibrate the compass manually. How-
ever, prior to calibrating the compass, make sure the
proper Compass Variance value is selected (Refer to
“Compass Variance” for additional information). Then
continue to calibrate the compass as follows:
1. Start the engine. Leave the selector lever in PARK in
order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
3. Press and release the STEP button until “Calibrate
Compass Yes” displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the RESET button and the “CAL”
indicator will quit flashing.
5. Drive the vehicle slowly, completing one or more
circles (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” indicator turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
using the following procedure:
NOTE: Magnetic materials and cell phones should be
kept away from the top of the Instrument Panel. This is
where the compass sensor is located.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
4
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Leave the
selector lever in PARK.
2. Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
3. Press and release the STEP button until “Compass
Variance” and the current Variance Value displays in the
EVIC.
4. Press and release the RESET button to increment the
Variance Value by one, (one button press per update),
until the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
NOTE: The Variance Values will wrap around from 15
back to 1. The Default Variance is Zone 8.
5. Press and release the STEP button to exit. Press the
STEP button if you wish to calibrate the compass manu-
ally (Refer to “Manual Compass Calibration” later in this
section).
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
Personal settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until “Personal
Settings” displays in the EVIC.
Press and release the STEP button to display the follow-
ing programmable features:
Language
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the RESET button while in this display selects
English, Espanol, or Francais depending on availability.
As you continue, the displayed information will be
shown in the selected language.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Auto Unlock on Exit
When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position, all doors will unlock when the
driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press
and hold the RESET button until ON or OFF appears.
Remote Key Unlock
When “Driver Door 1st Press” is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the remote
keyless entry unlock button. When Driver Door 1st Press
is selected, you must press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When “All Doors 1st Press” is selected, all of the doors
will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button. To make your selection, press and release
the RESET button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All
Doors 1st Press” appears.
Sound Horn with Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the remote keyless entry LOCK button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights ON,
LOCK/UNLOCK feature. To make your selection, press
and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears.
Flash Lights with Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the Sound Horn on LOCK
feature selected. To make your selection, press and re-
lease the RESET button until ON or OFF appears.
Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and hold
the RESET button until 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds appears.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
4
Headlights With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and hold the RESET button until ON or
OFF appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3 of this manual.
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make
your selection, press and hold the RESET button until
Off, 45 sec., 5 min., or 10 min. appears.
Illumination Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To
make your selection, press and hold the RESET button
until OFF, 30, 60, or 90 seconds appears.
Display Units in English or Metric
The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English
and Metric units of measure. To make your selection,
press and release the RESET button until U.S. or METRIC
appears.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK
To set the analog clock, lo-
cated at the top center of the
instrument panel, press and
hold the button in until the
setting is correct. The clock
will adjust slowly at first and
then quicker the longer the
button is held.
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
nals.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals:
1. AM or Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmit-
ted sound causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio
waves to vary.
2. FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the frequency
of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
4
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and six–disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
will remain active for up to 90 seconds after the ignition
switch has been turned OFF, depending upon the AC-
CESSORY DELAY setting. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
RES Radio (Non-Satellite Model Shown - With Satellite
Similar)
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies,
pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before
continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the
SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
4
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free Phone) — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
4
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM modes.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
4
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM
stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The sta-
tions stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing
the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: This radio is capable of playing compact discs
(CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable com-
pact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
an inch (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must
be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
•
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
4
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD, MP3 modes.
SCAN Button
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button
Switches the AM or FM radio to the opposite radio mode.
RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
4
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
4
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System™ (VES威) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System™ (VES威)
Guide.”
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
REQ Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
4
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free Phone) — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at step
2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
4
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Program Type
16-Digit Character
Display
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
4
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
•
DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
•
DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
•
DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
•
Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
•
Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
•
Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
NOTE: The available selections for each of the above
entries varies depending upon the disc.
NOTE: These selections can only be made while playing
a DVD.
•
VES威 Power - Allows you to turn VES威 ON and OFF
(if equipped).
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
VES威 Lock - Locks out rear VES威 remote controls (if
equipped).
•
VES威 CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the mode
of either the IR1 or IR2, wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
•
Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
•
Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items, and set
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
4
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
4
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD, MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio to the Radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
4
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA Specifica-
tion
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit Rate (kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
4
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
For UConnect威 “Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to
“Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
4
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES威) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES威)
Guide.”
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威 Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited
DTS™
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc.
SALES CODE REN — MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN Multimedia system contains a radio, CD/DVD
player, USB port, a 20-gigabyte hard drive (HDD), and a
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“JukeBox” (virtual CD changer). Sirius Satellite Radio is
optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows for easy
menu selection.
A 20-gigabyte HDD allows uploads of music and photos
from CDs or through the USB port. The Gracenote
database finds the artist, track, and title for the music.
An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a
portable MP3 player through the vehicle’s speakers. For
vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System
(VES)威, separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen
to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play
through the system’s wireless headphones. This means
rear-seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional
rear seat entertainment system, while the driver and
front-seat passenger listen to the radio.
Other special features include direct tune, music type
selections, easy store presets, backup camera display for
vehicles equipped with a backup camera, and on some
models, a dual display screen operation. Refer to your
Radio-specific user’s manual for detailed operating in-
structions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your Radio-specific user’s manual for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
For Hands Free Phone Communication (UConnect威)
“Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
4
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect姞) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Clock Setting Procedure
Setting the Clock
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the multimedia system is
turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current
setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
SALES CODE RER — MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The RER Multimedia system contains a radio, Sirius
Satellite Radio player, navigation system, CD/DVD
player, USB port, 20-gigabyte hard drive (HDD), and the
UConnect威 Hands-Free Bluetooth威 cellular system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
4
NOTE: If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnect威,
the unit will respond with a “Not Equipped With
UConnect威” message when selecting controls related to
this feature.
A 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows easy menu selec-
tion, while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes
more than 1,000 words for audio, navigation, entertain-
ment, and hands-free mobile phone use.
The satellite navigation capability combines a Global-
Positioning System (GPS)-based navigation system with
an integrated color screen to provide maps, turn identi-
fication, selection menus, and instructions for selecting a
variety of destinations and routes.
A shared HDD for the navigation system, the database,
and other radio features allows uploads of music and
photos from CDs or through the USB port. The Gracenote
database finds the artist, track, and title for the music.
An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a
portable MP3 player through the vehicle’s speakers. For
vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System
(VES)威, separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen
to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play
through the system’s wireless headphones. This means
rear-seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional
rear-seat entertainment system while the driver and
front-seat passenger listen to the radio.
Other special features include direct tune, music type
selections, traffic messaging (optional), easy store presets,
parental lockout for VES威 (if equipped), backup camera
display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera, and
on some models, a dual display screen operation. Refer to
your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed operating
instructions.
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect姞) (If Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Clock Setting Procedure
The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the
time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the sys-
tem’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words
“Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top of the screen,
proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
3. If the words “Time: User Clock” are displayed at the
top of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where
the words “User Clock” are displayed. The GPS time
setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
4
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis-
played to change the current setting.
Setting the User Clock
If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
performing the following:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words
“Time: User Clock” are displayed at the top of the screen,
proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
3. If the words “Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top
of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where the
words “GPS Time” are displayed. The user clock time
setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the system is turned off.
Proceed as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ
radios only with UConnect威. For sales code REN touch
screen radio, refer to the separate User’s Manual.
This feature allows you to plug an iPod威 mobile digital
device into the vehicle’s sound system through a connec-
tor (UCI connector) using an optional connection cable
(available through MOPAR威). See your authorized dealer
for details.
Using this feature,
•
the iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (Track Title, Artist, Al-
bum, etc.) information display on radio.
•
the iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse and List the iPod威 contents.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
4
•
the iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector.
Connecting The iPod姞 Device
Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod威 to
the vehicle’s UCI connector (which is located in the glove
box on some vehicles. This location may vary with
vehicle). Once the iPod威 is connected and synchronized
to the vehicle system (this may take a few seconds to
connect), the vehicle brand logo appears on the iPod威
display, and it starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches as described below.
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
iPod威, press the AUX button on the radio faceplate. Once
in the UCI (iPod威) mode, the iPod威 audio track (if
available from iPod威) will start playing over the vehicle
audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode the iPod威 will be in Play
mode. In Play mode, you may use the following buttons
on the radio faceplate to control the iPod威 and display
data:
TUNE/SCROLL Knob
Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to go to the next or
previous track.
The TUNE/SCROLL knob functions similar to the scroll
wheel on the iPod威 mobile digital device.
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click while playing
a track skips to the next track.
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click
during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the
previous track in the list and turning this button at any
other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the
current track.
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW (Rewind) Button
Press and hold the RW button to move backward in the
current track. Holding the RW button long enough will
take you back to the beginning of the current track.
Pressing and releasing the RW button will go back five
seconds of the current track.
FF (Fast Forward) Button
Press and hold the FF button to move forward in the
current track.
Pressing and releasing the FF button will go forward five
seconds of the current track.
SEEK Buttons
Use the SEEK buttons to move to the previous or the next
track.
If the left (down) button is pressed during the first two
seconds of the current track, it will go back to the
previous track in the list; if you press this button at any
other time in the current track it will go back to the
beginning of the track.
If the right (up) button is pressed during Play mode, it
will go to the next track in the list.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button while a track is playing to see the
information (Track Title, Artist, Album, etc.) for that
track. Each press of the INFO button will take you to the
next screen of data for that track. Once you have seen all
of the screens, the last press of the INFO button will take
you back to the Play mode screen on the radio.
REPEAT Button
Press the REPEAT button to repeat the current playing
track.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
4
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button will play the first five seconds
of each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, press the SCAN button again.
During the SCAN mode, you can also press the SEEK
button to the left or right to go to the previous or next
tracks.
RND (Random) Button (RES Radios Only)
Pressing the RND button will switch between the shuffle
on and shuffle off modes of the iPod威. If the RND icon is
showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is on.
List or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the following buttons
will take you to List mode. List mode enables you to
scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod威
device.
TUNE/SCROLL Knob
In the List mode, the TUNE/SCROLL knob functions in
a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
Turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob clockwise (forward)
and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through lists,
displaying the track detail on the radio display. Once you
have the track to be played highlighted on the radio
display, press the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select and
start playing the track. By turning the TUNE/SCROLL
knob fast, you can jump through the list faster. During
fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating the
information on the radio display.
During all List modes, the iPod威 will display all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track you wish to select is
at the bottom of the list, you just turn the TUNE/
SCROLL knob backward (counterclockwise) to get to the
track faster.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio Preset Buttons
In the List mode, the radio preset buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 device.
•
1 – Playlists
•
2 – Artists
•
3 – Albums
•
4 – Genres
•
5 - Audiobooks
•
6 – Podcasts
After pressing a preset button, you will see the list you
are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
To exit the List mode without selecting a track, press the
same preset button again to go back to Play mode.
LIST Button
Pressing the LIST button will take to the top level menu
of the iPod威. This takes you to the same top level menu
as on your iPod威. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to list
the top menu item you wish to select and then press the
TUNE/SCROLL knob. This will take you to the next sub
menu list item of the iPod威 and you can follow the same
steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod威
sub menu levels are available on this system.
MUSIC TYPE Button
The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to
the genre listing on your iPod威.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
4
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
(REN/REQ/RER/RES RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account at no addi-
tional charge. For further information, call the toll-free
number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Cana-
dian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With RES/REQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio ON, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With RER/REN Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will be displayed.
Selecting Satellite Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
4
Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist, Song
Title, and Composer (if available) information. Also,
pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional
three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title
all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal
display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
4
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES姞) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES威)
Guide.”
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Remote Sound Controls
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on mode.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
CDs on the Six-Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This
button does not function for all other radios.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
4
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)姞 —IF
EQUIPPED
The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)威 in-
cludes the following components for rear seat entertain-
ment:
•
A diagonal 7 in (17.8 cm) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
screen integrated into the center console armrest. The
screen features brightness control for optimum day-
time and nighttime viewing.
•
The LCD screen swings up from the rear of the armrest
to allow the rear seat passenger(s) to view the display.
Opening the Rear Seat VES威
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been
raised to its viewing position.
•
The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow
front seat operation for easy setup in the case of
younger rear seat passengers.
•
A battery-powered infrared remote control snaps into
a molded compartment in the center console armrest
upper storage bin.
•
Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen-
gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources.
VES威 Video Screen
VES威 Remote Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
4
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks)
on the rear of the center console enable
the monitor to display video directly
from a video camera, connect video
games for display on the screen, or
play music directly from an MP3
player.
1. Video in (yellow)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Right audio in (red)
NOTE: Refer to your “Vehicle Entertainment System
(VES)威 Users Manual” for detailed operating instruc-
tions.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
8. Do not play discs that are small in size or have
irregular shapes.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
4
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate
the amount of air forced
through the ventilation sys-
tem in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move
the control to the right from
the “O” (Off) position. There
are four blower speeds.
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate
the temperature of the air in-
side the passenger compart-
ment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale
indicates cooler temperatures
while the rotating right into
the red area indicates warmer
temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser: located in front of the radiator, for an accumula-
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose
from several patterns of air
distribution. You can select ei-
ther a primary mode as iden-
tified by the symbols on the
control, or a blend of two of
these modes. The closer the
setting is to a particular sym-
bol, the more air distribution
you receive from that mode.
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and side
window demist outlets.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
4
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix
and Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed. This de-
humidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control
Press in on this button to
block the flow of outside air
from coming into the passen-
ger compartment. A light will
illuminate when the system is
in recirculation mode. Only
use the recirculation mode as
a temporary means to block
out any outside odors, smoke,
or dust, and to cool the inte-
rior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid
weather.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture build-up inside the vehicle. Select
the Outside Air position for maximum defogging.
•
The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
control is set to panel or panel / floor.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection.
•
When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
Air Conditioning Control
Press in on this button to en-
gage the Air Conditioning. A
light will illuminate when the
Air Conditioning System is
engaged. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale
indicates cooler temperatures
while the rotating right into
the red area indicates warmer
temperatures.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
•
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
4
•
ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
off the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
The Infrared Climate Control System automatically
maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the
comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger. To
Automatic Temperature Control
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
accomplish this, the system gathers information from the
cabin infrared sensor mounted between the sun-visors
and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle.
The controls on the climate control provide the system
with operator input. Other sensors take account of ve-
hicle speed, A/C pressure, outside temperature, and
engine cooling temperature. Using all of these inputs, the
system automatically adjusts airflow temperature, air-
flow distribution, airflow volume, and the amount of
outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable
temperature even under changing conditions.
Operation of the system is quite simple.
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat
occupants only.
2. Dial in the temperature
you would like the system to
maintain by rotating the Tem-
perature Control knob. Once
the comfort level is selected,
the system will maintain that
level automatically using the
heating system. Should the
desired comfort level require
air conditioning, the system
will automatically make the adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the “O” (Off) position on the blower control stops the
system completely and closes the outside air intake.
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
4
NOTE:
•
The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time
without affecting automatic operation.
•
Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
air conditioning is not necessary.
•
If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser: lo-
cated in front of the radiator, for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre-
ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
Operation Chart that follows for details.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
4
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
•
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to
direct airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be
aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat
passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
•
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
•
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demist outlets.
•
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demist outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require
extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
•
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Air Conditioner Control
Press this button to turn on the air conditioning
during manual operation only. When the air
conditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified
air will flow through the outlets selected with the
Mode control dial. Press this button a second time to
turn off the air conditioning. An LED in the button
illuminates when manual compressor operation is
selected.
•
Recirculation Control
The system will automatically control recir-
culation. However, pressing the Recircula-
tion Control button will temporarily put the
system in recirculation mode (ten minutes).
This can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
control button to illuminate. After ten minutes, the
system will return to normal AUTO mode function
and the LED will turn off.
NOTE:
•
When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
•
In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or defrost/
floor mode in order to improve window clearing.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
modes are selected.
•
Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
4
Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, or
defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recircula-
tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the
control button to blink and then turn off.
•
Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
Mode by pressing the Recirculation Button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
Button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then
turn off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
recirculation mode at this time. If you would like the
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
move the Mode Knob to Panel, Panel/Floor and then
press the Recirculation Button. This feature reduces
the possibility of window fogging.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 of this manual
for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh
air and high blower settings. This will insure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-
pressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods as fogging may occur.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
4
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The A/C Air Filter will reduce, but not eliminate, diesel
and agricultural smells. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-
senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in Section 7 of this manual for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedules” in Section 8 of this
manual for filter service intervals.
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
4
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Electric Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped
The electric Rear Window Defroster Control is
located on the climate control. Press this button to
turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side
mirrors (if equipped). An LED in the button will illumi-
nate when the rear window defroster is ON. The de-
froster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes of operation for the first push of the button, and
will turn off after approximately five minutes for the
second push of the button.
CAUTION!
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures .....................264
▫ Automatic Transaxle ...................264
▫ Normal Starting ......................265
▫ Tip Start Feature — Automatic Transaxle
Only ..............................266
▫ Extremely Cold Weather
(Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺29°C) ................266
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................266
▫ After Starting ........................267
▫ Remote Start System — If Equipped ........267
▫ How To Use Remote Start ...............268
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped .........269
䡵 Automatic Transaxle .....................270
▫ Brake/Transaxle Interlock ...............272
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock
System .............................272
▫ Electronically Controlled Automatic
Transaxle ...........................273
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped ................275
▫ AutoStick威 Operation ..................276
5
▫ AutoStick威 General Information ...........277
䡵 Parking Brake .........................277
䡵 Brake System ..........................281
▫ Anti—Lock Brake System (ABS) ...........282
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System –
ABS/TCS/BAS/ESP .....................285
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) —
If Equipped .........................285
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) —
If Equipped .........................285
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) — If Equipped ....286
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) .........287
䡵 Power Steering ........................290
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..............291
▫ Acceleration .........................291
▫ Traction ............................292
䡵 Driving Through Water ..................292
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................292
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................293
䡵 Tire Safety Information ...................294
▫ Tire Markings ........................294
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ..........298
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........299
䡵 Tires—General Information ................303
▫ Tire Pressure .........................303
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................304
▫ Radial-Ply Tires ......................306
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped .........307
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped .........307
▫ TireSpinning ........................308
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................309
▫ LifeOfTire .........................309
▫ Replacement Tires .....................310
▫ Alignment And Balance .................312
䡵 Tire Chains ...........................312
䡵 Snow Tires ...........................312
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations ............313
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) —
If Equipped ...........................314
▫ Base System — If Equipped ..............316
▫ Premium System — If Equipped ..........318
▫ General Information ...................322
䡵 Fuel Requirements ......................323
▫ 2.4L And 2.7L Engines ..................323
▫ 3.5L Engine .........................323
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................324
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............324
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................325
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................326
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
5
▫ Fuel System Cautions ..................326
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ..............327
䡵 Flexible Fuel— 2.7L Engines Only
(Except California Emission States) ..........328
▫ E-85 General Information ................328
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ....................329
▫ Fuel Requirements ....................329
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles .......330
▫ Starting ............................331
▫ Cruising Range .......................331
▫ Replacement Parts .....................331
▫ Maintenance .........................331
䡵 Adding Fuel ..........................332
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............332
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............334
䡵 Vehicle Loading ........................335
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ...............335
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......336
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) .........336
▫ Overloading .........................336
▫ Loading ............................337
䡵 TrailerTowing .........................338
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............338
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............340
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .........341
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............342
▫ Towing Requirements ..................343
▫ TowingTips .........................347
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) .................349
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) ............................349
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
5
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.
Make sure all occupants have securely fastened their seat
belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep
in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently
moving the gear selection lever or by pressing the
accelerator pedal. This may cause excessive heat in
the exhaust system, resulting in overheating and
vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries.
Automatic Transaxle
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of Park.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Starting
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply turn the ignition switch to the “START” position
and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to
start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
normal starting procedure.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
axle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
erly, so follow the procedure carefully. See section 6
of this manual for jump starting instructions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
5
Tip Start Feature — Automatic Transaxle Only
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition key briefly
to START position, and release it. The starter motor will
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
when the engine is running.
Extremely Cold Weather (below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails to Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15
seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure.
Ignition Key Position
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
Remote Start System — If Equipped
Remote start conveniently starts the engine from outside
the vehicle by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key
fob while maintaining security. The system has a targeted
range of 328 ft. (100 m). The vehicle must be locked, the
deck lid and hood closed and the transmission in Park in
order to start the engine using the Remote Start button on
the key fob.
NOTE: Remote start requires Automatic Transaxle
equipped vehicles.
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
5
How To Use Remote Start
To enter the Remote Start mode , depress the Remote
Start button twice on the key fob. The engine will start
and the vehicle will remain in the remote start mode for
a 15 minute cycle.
To exit the Remote Start mode , allow the
engine to run the cycle or depress the unlock
button to disarm the Vehicle Theft Security
Alarm and within one minute insert the key
into the ignition and turn the ignition to the RUN
position. The ignition must be in the RUN position in
order to drive the vehicle.
NOTE: The engine can be started two consecutive times
(two 15 minute cycles) by using the key fob. For a third
cycle, the key must be cycled to the ignition RUN
position and then repeat the start sequence.
To shut off the vehicle when it is in Remote Start mode,
press the remote start button once. In order to avoid
inadvertent shut downs, the one-time press to shut down
the vehicle will be disabled for two seconds after receipt
of a valid remote start request.
Remote Start
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode,
power window and sunroof operation are disabled for
security.
The following conditions must be met before the engine
will remote start:
•
Automatic Transaxle in Park
•
All doors are closed
•
Hood is closed
•
Hazard Switch is off
•
Brake Switch is inactive
•
Key is not in the ignition
•
Battery is at an acceptable charge level
•
Panic button on key fob is not depressed
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood
between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte-
grated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver side of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
5
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
CAUTION!
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
•
Shift the gear selector lever into PARK only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•
Shift the gear selector lever into or out of RE-
VERSE only after the vehicle has come to a com-
plete stop and the engine is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift the gear selector lever from RE-
VERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward
gear when the engine is above idle speed.
•
Before shifting the gear selector lever into any
gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal.
Automatic Gear Selector Lever
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of
PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in REVERSE. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift the
gear selector lever into gear when the engine is idling
normally and when your right foot is firmly on the
brake pedal.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the gear selector lever into PARK, remove the
key from the ignition, and apply the parking brake.
Once the key is removed from the ignition, the gear
selector lever is locked in the PARK position, secur-
ing the vehicle against unwanted movement. Further-
more, you should never leave children unattended
inside a vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
5
BRAKE/TRANSAXLE INTERLOCK
This system prevents you from moving the gear selector
lever out of PARK and into any gear unless the brake
pedal is pressed. This system is active only while the
ignition switch is in the ON position. Always press the
brake pedal first, before moving the gear selector lever
out of PARK.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the transaxle will not
shift out of PARK. Battery power is required to release the
brake/transaxle interlock system. However, there is an
override system that allows you to shift out of PARK in
case of loss of power. To activate the override system:
•
Firmly apply the parking brake
•
Insert the ignition key and rotate it to the ON position
•
Remove the cup holder liner
•
Insert a key, screwdriver, or finger into the front hole
then push and hold the manual override release lever
forward.
•
While holding the release lever forward, move the
gear selector lever from PARK to NEUTRAL. Release
the manual override lever.
NOTE: If this occurs, even if the override is successful,
it is recommended that you visit a dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equip-
ment to determine if the problem could recur.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE IGNITION INTERLOCK
SYSTEM
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the gear selector lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting
out of PARK unless the key is in the ON position and the
brake pedal is applied.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE
The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise
shift schedule. The transaxle electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles.
GEAR RANGES
PARK
PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the
transaxle. The engine can be started in this range. Never
attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion. Apply
parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range.
When parking on a flat surface, place the selector lever in
the PARK position first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the selector lever in PARK, other-
wise the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the selector out of PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb
on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
Never use PARK position on an Automatic Transaxle
as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply
parking brake fully when parked to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
5
CAUTION!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range as
this can damage the drivetrain.
REVERSE
Use this range for moving the vehicle rearward. Shift into
this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Engine may be started in this range.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
DRIVE/OVERDRIVE — Six-Speed Transaxle
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving, it provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
and best fuel economy. However, use the AutoStick威
mode and select the [5] range when frequent transaxle
shifting occurs while using the DRIVE/OVERDRIVE
range, such as when operating the vehicle under heavy
loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling into
strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers). Under
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
these conditions, using the [5] range will improve perfor-
mance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build-up.
RESET MODE — Electronic Transaxle
The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal
conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transaxle automatically shifts into second
gear. The transaxle remains in second gear (third gear
with a six-speed automatic) despite the forward gear
selected. PARK, REVERSE, AND NEUTRAL will con-
tinue to operate. This RESET feature allows the vehicle to
be driven to a dealer for service without damaging the
transaxle.
In the event that the problem has been momentary, the
transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the gear selector lever into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position then restart
the engine.
4. Shift the gear selector lever into the desired gear range
and resume driving.
NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, it is recom-
mended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
If the transaxle cannot be reset, authorized dealer service
is required.
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transaxle that offers six
manual ratio changes to provide you with more control.
AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
5
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
AUTOSTICK姞 OPERATION
By placing the gear selector lever one shift-level below
the DRIVE position, it can be moved from side to side.
This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of
gears. Moving the gear selector lever to the Left (-)
triggers a downshift and to the Right (+) an upshift. The
gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the
transaxle range indicator.
NOTE: In Autostick威 mode, the transaxle will only shift
up or down when the driver moves the gear selector
lever to the Right (+) or Left (-).
AutoStick威 is deactivated when the lever is shifted from
the AutoStick (+/-) position into the DRIVE position.
AutoStick威 Gear Selector Lever
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
AutoStick姞 General Information
•
You can start out in first or second gear. The system
will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle
speed.
•
If a ratio other than 1st is selected, and the vehicle is
brought to a stop, the transaxle control logic will
automatically select the 1st gear ratio.
•
Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
•
Avoid using speed control when Autostick威 is en-
gaged.
•
The transaxle will automatically shift up when maxi-
mum engine speed is reached while Autostick威 is
engaged.
•
Transaxle shifting will be more noticeable when
Autostick威 is engaged.
•
If a downshift would cause the engine to over-speed,
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
Mostly the transaxle will stay in the manually selected
ratio, however.
•
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transaxle will revert to the automatic shift mode and
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
•
If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
AutoStick威 mode and the transaxle will return to the
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition on, the Brake Light in the instrument
cluster will come on.
NOTE: This light, when illuminated with parking brake
application, shows only that the parking brake is on. It
does not show the degree of brake application.
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
5
NOTE: If the light remains on with the parking brake
released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have
the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer im-
mediately.
NOTE: If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle
is moving, a chime will sound to alert the driver. The
chime will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has
returned to a stop.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and the gear selector is in the PARK
position.
To release the parking brake, slightly pull up the handle
while pushing the lock button, and guide the lever
downward to its stop. The brake warning light in the
instrument cluster should go out.
NOTE: The parking brake lever will not release unless
the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position.
Operation with an Automatic Transaxle
When parking on a flat surface, place the gear selector
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake.
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to set the
parking brake BEFORE placing the gear selector in
PARK, otherwise the load on the automatic transaxle
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the
selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade.
Operation with a Manual Transaxle — If Equipped
Place the gear selector in REVERSE. As an added precau-
tion, when parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on
an uphill grade.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Applying the Parking Brake
To apply the parking brake, grasp the handle and pull it
upward until you feel resistance. To release the parking
brake, grasp the handle and pull it slightly while pressing
the button on the end of the handle. When the button
drops into the handle (releasing the lock), guide the
handle downward to its stop and then release the button
and the handle.
NOTE: You should always apply the parking brake
before leaving the vehicle.
Parking Brake Lever
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
5
WARNING!
Never use PARK position on an automatic transaxle
as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply
parking brake fully when parked to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
injured. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A
child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving. Failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (i.e. repeated brake applications with the
engine off) the brakes will still function. However, the
effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater
than that required with the power system operating.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
5
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. A significant decrease in braking performance or
vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will
take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your
vehicle harder to control. You could have an accident.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
ANTI—LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the
brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural
laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake
System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function-
ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
5
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
•
the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
•
brake pedal pulsations,
•
and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interfer-
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM –
ABS/TCS/BAS/ESP
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad-
vanced electronic brake control system that includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System
(TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), and Electronic Stability
Program (ESP). All systems work together to enhance
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions
and are commonly referred to as ESP.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in this Section of the
manual for more information about ABS.
Traction Control System (TCS) — If Equipped
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin
of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, brake pressure is applied to the slip-
ping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to
provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of
the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differ-
ential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if TCS and ESP are in the “Partial Off” mode.
Refer to “Electronic Stability Program (ESP)” in this
Section of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
5
Brake Assist System (BAS) — If Equipped
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
•
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
•
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP cor-
rects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter-
acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, ESP applies the brake
of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light,” located in the instru-
ment cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose
traction and the ESP system becomes active. The “ESP/
TCS Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If
the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
5
WARNING!
•
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions.
•
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
ESP Operating Modes
All ESP equipped vehicles can choose the following ESP
operating modes:
ESP ON
This is the normal operating mode for ESP. Whenever the
vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for almost all driving situa-
tions. ESP should only be turned to “Partial Off” for
specific reasons as noted below.
PARTIAL ESP Mode
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the
“ESP Control Switch.” When in “Partial Off” mode, the
TCS portion of ESP, except for the “limited slip” feature
described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other
stability features of ESP function normally, with the
exception of engine power reduction. This mode is
intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand,
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP
would normally allow is required to gain traction.
To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the “ESP
Control Switch.” This will restore the normal “ESP On”
mode of operation.
WARNING!
In the Partial ESP mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are desensitized. Therefore, the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the ESP switch. Once the situation
requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESP on again by momentarily depressing
the “ESP Control Switch.” This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is com-
bined with the BAS indicator. The yellow
“ESP/BAS Warning Light” and the yellow
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position. They should both go out with the
engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning Light” comes
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in either the ESP or BAS system, or
both. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
5
NOTE:
•
The “ESP Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS Warning
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition
switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
5
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water, and if there are any obstacles
in the way, before driving through the standing
water.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
CAUTION!
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not con-
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam-
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
5
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8
km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/65R15 95H.
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
•
LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
5
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
5
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code
located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the
TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted
on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
B-PILLAR LOCATION
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
5
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec-
tion of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs.
(392 Kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
5
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on either
the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side “B” pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
B-PILLAR LOCATION
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire side wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
5
loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only.
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph (80
km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread
life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings which apply
to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
5
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in Section 6 of this
manual for additional information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30
mph (48 km/h) when you are stuck. And don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
5
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years,
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have an accident resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, han-
dling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi-
cations or capability.
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics, result-
ing in changes to steering, handling, and braking of
your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling
and stress to steering and suspension components.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
5
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
•
Fast tire wear.
•
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
SNOW TIRES
Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc-
tion as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the
snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed
requirement associated with the tire. These tires should
always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity
inflation pressures under any load condition.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the
recommended tire rotation frequency. Remember, more
frequent rotation is permissible if desired. Also, correct
for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to
performing the tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”
shown in the following diagram.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
5
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) — IF
EQUIPPED
•
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
•
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pres-
sure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km)
after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure
molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to the “Tires –
General Information” in this section for information
on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this
is normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
•
The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-
pressure warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss through
the tire.
•
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of
low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low
tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-
tale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire
pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to
turn off. The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
−
For example, your vehicle may have a recom-
mended cold (parked for more than 3 hours) placard
pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient tempera-
ture is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is
27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C)
will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23
psi (157 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low
enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa),
but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after
the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
5
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Telltale light.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. Once the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures, the system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Check TPMS Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
5
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have
a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15
mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale
Light will turn OFF, as long no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel-wells)
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
•
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values flashing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
5
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those flashing in
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash-
ing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, a chime will sound and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message for 3 seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is
not being received.
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire (if so equipped) does not have
a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPM Telltale
Light will remain ON, a chime will sound, and the EVIC
will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic
display.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15
mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,
the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
for 3 seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
5
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for 3 seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States ..................... KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.4L and 2.7L Engines
2.4L and 2.7L engines are designed to meet
all emission regulations and provide excel-
lent fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “regular”
gasolines having an octane rating of 87.
The use of premium gasoline is not recom-
mended. Under normal conditions, the use of premium
gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality
unleaded “regular” gasolines, and in some circumstances
may result in poorer performance.
3.5L Engine
The 3.5L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
tory fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded gasoline hav-
ing an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu-
facturer recommends the use of 89 octane
for optimum performance. The use of pre-
mium gasoline is not recommended. Un-
der normal conditions, the use of premium
gasoline will not provide a benefit over
high quality unleaded “regular” and “mid-
grade” gasolines, and in some circumstances may result
in poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
5
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the ap-
propriate octane rating for your engine) before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which
define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced
emissions, engine performance, and durability for your
vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gaso-
lines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are
available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
For vehicles equipped with a 2.4L or 3.5L engine, DO
NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Etha-
nol. Use of these blends may result in starting and
driveability problems and may damage critical fuel
system components.
NOTE: The 2.7L engine is now rated for E85 Ethanol
use (EXCEPT CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES). Only
vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can operate on
E-85. For more information, see “Flexible Fuel” in this
section.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Metha-
nol.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emission system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
or not his/her gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
lated gasolines.
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
5
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance
and damage the emission control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
•
Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
5
FLEXIBLE FUEL— 2.7L ENGINES ONLY (EXCEPT
CALIFORNIA EMISSION STATES)
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. This section only covers those subjects that
are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to the other
sections of this manual for information on features that
are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only
powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the special E-85 fuel filler cap can
operate on E-85.
E-85 Fuel Cap
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
Along with the special E-85 fuel filler cap, your vehicle
may display a badge, which also indicates it can operate
on E-85.
ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two.
E-85 Badge
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
5
For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates be-
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided.
When you do switch fuels, it is recommended that:
•
you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than
1
⁄
4
full
•
you do not add less than 5 gallons when refueling
•
you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in drivability
during warm up.
NOTE: When the ambient temperature is above 90° F
(32° C), you may experience hard starting and rough idle
following start up even if the above recommendations are
followed.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) and Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in Mopar威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
DaimlerChrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufac-
turer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified
and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-
6395. MS-6395 contains additional requirements, devel-
oped during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional
protection to DaimlerChrysler Corporation engines. Use
Mopar威 or an equivalent oil meeting the specification
MS-6395.
NOTE: Your engine oil filler cap also describes the
correct engine oil to use.
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0° F (-18° C). In
the range of 0° F (-18° C) to 32° F (0° C), you may
experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine
to start, and a deterioration in drivability (sags and/or
hesitations) until the engine is fully warmed up.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than
gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel con-
sumption. You can expect your miles per gallon (mpg)
and your driving range to decrease by about 30% com-
pared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
5
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
As a reminder, a fuel icon with an arrow
indicating which side of the vehicle the fuel
filler door is located on, is located in the
instrument cluster, just below the Fuel Gage.
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left rear
quarter panel of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable
over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the
gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s
surface.
NOTE: If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the
replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
•
A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler Door Features
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
5
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and doing so will cause the malfunction indicator
light to turn on.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The Malfunction Indicator Light in the in-
strument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not
secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tight-
ened each time the vehicle is refueled.
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“GASCAP” or “FUEL CAP OFF” message will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a “clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
reset button to turn off the message. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving
the problem will turn the MIL light off.
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
Vehicle Loading Capacities
Front Seat Occupants .......................2
Rear Seat Occupants ....................... 3
Luggage.................13.0cu.ft.(0.368cu.M)
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the
“Vehicle Certification Label.” This information should be
used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
Vehicle Curb Weight
2.4 L Base....................3287 lbs (1491 kg)
2.7 L Base....................3356 lbs (1522 kg)
2.7 L Touring ................. 3376 lbs (1531 kg)
2.7 L Limited ................. 3419 lbs (1551 kg)
3.5 L Limited ................. 3499 lbs (1587 kg)
If the seatbacks are folded for carrying cargo, do not
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a certification label attached to the rear
of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
•
Name of manufacturer
•
Month and year of manufacture
•
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
•
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Type of Vehicle
•
Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
5
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front
and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to insure that it
is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
Vehicle with a GVWR of 4480
EXAMPLE ONLY Front Axle Rear Axle
Empty Weight 1853 lbs
(841 kg)
1631 lbs
(740 kg )
Load (Including driver,
passengers, and cargo)
271 lbs
(123 kg)
579 lbs
(263 kg)
Total 2124 lbs
(963 kg)
2210 lbs
(1002 kg)
GAWR 2195 lbs
(997 kg)
2285 lbs
(1036 kg)
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” at-
tached to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR. This table is only an example.
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
5
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing
this section, please consult your dealer to for full details
on the towing capabilities of the vehicle.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recom-
mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in-
clude a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
Tongue Weight (TW) is the downward force exerted on
the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be
less than or more than 10% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
5
Frontal Area
Frontal Area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer and its cargo.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the truck. These kinds of hitches
are the most popular on the market today and they’re
commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
ClassI-LightDuty 2,000lbs(907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transaxle Max. Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt.
1
2.4L/Auto See Note
2
1000 lbs (450 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
2.7L/Auto See Note
2
1500 lbs (680 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
3.5L/Auto 22 Sq., Ft. (2.0 Sq. M) 2000 lbs (900 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
1
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and it
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in Section 5 of this manual.
2
Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with front
shields/guards are not recommended for use with all 4
cylinder and 2.7L engines with automatic transaxle.
Please refer to the following website, http://www-
5.chrysler.com/searchapp/ui.jsp or your dealer for addi-
tional information.
CAUTION!
Towing a trailer with a larger than recommended
frontal area could cause the engine to overheat or cause
severe engine damage under extreme conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
5
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause
the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause
loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load
trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Incorrect tongue weight could result in increased
yaw or vehicle instability. A negative tongue weight
could unload the rear suspension of the tow vehicle
decreasing vehicle stability. Negative tongue weight
could cause the trailer to squat and potentially be-
come disengaged from the tow vehicle resulting in a
runaway trailer condition.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
5
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When traile-
ring cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load
shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause
a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transaxle, steering, suspension,
chassis structure, or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transaxle in P
for Park. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve 10% of tongue weight as a percentage of total
trailer weight).
Towing Requirements — Tires
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
“Tires — General Information” in this section for
information on tire pressures and for proper tire
inflation procedures.
•
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires — General
Information” in this section for information on tread
wear indicators and for proper inspection procedure.
•
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires — General Infor-
mation” in this section for information on replacement
tires and for proper tire replacement procedures. Re-
placing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will
not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
5
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Make sure all trailer and vehicle lights are working
properly — including hazard flashers.
4-Pin Connector
7-Pin Connector
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
5
Automatic Transaxle
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, third
gear for a four—speed automatic and the fifth gear for a
six-speed AutoStick威 should be selected.
NOTE: Using third or fifth instead of DRIVE while
operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions,
will improve performance and extend transaxle life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action
will also provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the auto-
matic transaxle fluid and filter according to the interval
specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer tow-
ing” in the “Maintenance Schedule” in this manual.
NOTE: Check the four-speed automatic transaxle fluid
level before towing. AutoStick威 six—speed transmission
is sealed and the fluid level cannot be checked. See your
authorized dealership service center for assistance.
Electronic Speed Control (If Equipped)
•
Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
•
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transaxle overheating,
take the following actions:
•
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transaxle in
neutral and increase engine idle speed.
•
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
•
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
•
Refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-
tion.
If you have any questions or concerns after reviewing
this section, please consult your dealer to for full details
on the towing capabilities of the vehicle.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
towing with all four wheels on the ground)
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the driv-
etrain will result.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher ..................353
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats .................353
▫ Engine Oil Overheating — 2.4L Engine Only
(If Equipped) ........................355
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing ................356
▫ Jack Location ........................356
▫ Spare Tire Stowage ....................356
▫ Spare Tire Removal ....................356
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................357
▫ Jacking Instructions ....................358
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures Due To A Low
Battery ..............................364
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..................367
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle ................368
▫ With The Ignition Key ..................368
▫ Without The Ignition Key ...............369
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) ............................369
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The flasher switch is located on the instrument panel,
below the radio. Depress the switch and both cluster
indicators and all front and rear directional signals will
flash. Depress the switch again to turn Hazard Warning
Flashers off.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may wear down
your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
On the highways — Slow down.
•
In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Hazard Warning Flasher
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 353
6
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle
with the engine at idle, when safe. Turn off the air
conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red)
mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off imme-
diately and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle,
when safe. Turn the air conditioner off and wait until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. After
appropriate action has been taken, if the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,
and call for service.
354 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7, Maintenance, of this
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
Engine Oil Overheating — 2.4L Engine Only (If
Equipped)
During sustained high-speed driving or trailer tow up
long grades on a hot day, the engine oil temperature may
become too hot. If this happens, the “HOTOIL” message
flashes in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be
reduced to 53 mph (85 km/h) until the engine oil
temperature is reduced.
NOTE: The vehicle speed is reduced to a maximum of
53 mph (85 km/h). You may of course, reduce your
vehicle speed further if needed.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 355
6
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the trunk.
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the trunk.
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transaxle) or REVERSE
(manual transaxle). Turn OFF the ignition.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
•
Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
•
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the
vehicle is being jacked.
Spare Tire and Jack Stowage
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 357
6
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in park; a manual transmission in
reverse.
Jack Warning Label
358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
•
Turn on the Hazard warning flasher.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359
6
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
NOTE: The Jack Handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Locations
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 361
6
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in step 3.
3. There are two front jacking locations and two rear
jacking locations on each side of the body (as pictured
above).
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the wheel nuts, and pull the wheel and wheel
covers (where applicable) off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid
the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten
the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts, until
each nut has been tightened twice. Correct wheel nut
torque is 100 ft. lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area and have
the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
11. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
Correct pressure as required.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 363
6
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES DUE TO A LOW
BATTERY
Jump-starting remote battery terminals are located under
the hood.
The battery is stored between the left front headlight
assembly and the left front wheel splash shield. Access is
through the splash shield.
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly, so
follow this procedure carefully.
•
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output that exceeds 12 volts.
364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park
that vehicle within booster cable reach, but without
allowing the vehicles to touch. Set parking brake, place
automatic transaxle in PARK and turn ignition to LOCK
for both vehicles.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
3. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal loads.
4. Remove the protective cover over the remote jump-
start positive battery post (+) in the engine compartment.
Connect one end of the jumper cable to the positive
battery post. Connect the other end of the same cable to
the positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the
following illustration for jump-starting connections.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (-)
of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure
you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to
the following illustration for jump-starting connections.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 365
6
6. If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi-
lizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for 3
seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START
position.
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the se-
quence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
9. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote jump-
start positive battery post.
WARNING!
During cold weather when temperatures are below
freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged battery
may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting because
the battery could rupture or explode. The battery
temperature must be brought up above freezing
point before attempting jump-start.
Jump-Starting Location
366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7
of this manual for information on accessing the battery
for service or replacement.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and First gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal pres-
sure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con-
trol, turn the system to Partial OFF before
attempting to “rock” the vehicle. Refer to “Par-
tial Off Mode” under “Electronic Stability Pro-
gram (ESP)” in Section 5 of this manual.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367
6
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle and
tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you
are stuck, and don’t let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h). Do not spin the wheels continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
With The Ignition Key
Front Wheel Drive
Your vehicle may be towed (with all 4 wheels flat on the
ground), under the following conditions: The gear selec-
tor must be in NEUTRAL, the distance to be traveled
must not exceed 15 miles (25 km), and the towing speed
must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). Exceeding these
towing limits may cause a transaxle failure. If the trans-
axle is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more
than 15 miles (25 km), the vehicle must be transported
either with a flat bed truck or with the front wheels off
the ground.
All Wheel Drive
Your All Wheel Drive vehicle must be transported on a
flat bed truck.
368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
•
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position, not in
the LOCK or ACC position.
•
Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
•
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
axle may result.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON position,
not the ACC position. Make certain the transaxle remains
in NEUTRAL.
WITHOUT THE IGNITION KEY
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. Flat bed towing
is the preferred towing method. However, if a flat bed
towing vehicle is not available, a wheel lift towing
vehicle may be used. Furthermore, rear towing is not
recommended with the front wheels on the ground, as
transaxle damage can result. If rear towing is the only
alternative, a front end dolly must be used. Proper
towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat towing with all four wheels on the
ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, is only permitted within the limitations
described in this section.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 369
6
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE WITH A TOW DOLLY
Rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels
on the ground, as transaxle damage can result. If rear
towing is the only alternative, a front end dolly must be
used. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Without Power — Override Transaxle Interlock
System
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle.
Battery power is required to release the brake/transaxle
interlock system. There is an override system that allows
you to shift out of PARK in case of loss of power. To
activate the override system:
•
Firmly apply the parking brake.
•
Insert the ignition key and rotate it to the ON position.
•
Remove the cup holder liner.
•
Insert a key, screwdriver, or finger into the front hole
then push and hold the manual override release lever
forward.
•
While holding the release lever forward, move the
shift lever from Park to Neutral.
•
Release the override.
370 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 2.4L Gas Engine Compartment .............374
䡵 2.7L Gas Engine Compartment .............375
䡵 3.5L Engine Compartment ................376
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ........377
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............377
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................378
䡵 Replacement Parts ......................379
䡵 Authorized Dealer Service ................380
䡵 Maintenance Procedures ..................380
▫ Engine Oil ..........................380
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................384
▫ DriveBelt...........................384
▫ Spark Plugs .........................385
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................385
▫ Catalytic Converter ....................385
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ................387
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............388
7
▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped ............389
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check ............391
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints ..............391
▫ Steering Linkage ......................392
▫ Body Lubrication .....................392
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ................392
▫ Windshield Washers ...................393
▫ Exhaust System ......................393
▫ Cooling System .......................394
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses .......400
▫ Fuel System .........................400
▫ Brake System ........................400
▫ Automatic Transaxle ...................403
▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings ...........406
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................406
▫ Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders . . . 411
䡵 Fuses/Totally Integrated Power Module
(TIPM) ..............................412
䡵 Vehicle Storage ........................417
䡵 Replacement Bulbs ......................417
䡵 Bulb Replacement ......................418
▫ Headlight Bulb Replacement .............418
▫ Head Light Assembly Removal —
Bulb Replacement .....................420
▫ Front Turn Signal/Park Light .............422
▫ FrontFogLight ......................422
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Tail/Stop Light, Rear Turn Signal Light,
Backup Light ........................424
▫ License Plate Light ....................427
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . 428
䡵 Fluids And Capacities ...................429
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts ........430
▫ Engine .............................430
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
7
2.4L GAS ENGINE COMPARTMENT
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2.7L GAS ENGINE COMPARTMENT
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
7
3.5L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.5L Engine
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transaxle control systems. When these systems are oper-
ating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent per-
formance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions
well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
improperly installed. A “gASCAP” message will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the Trip Odometer
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
7
RESET button to turn off the message. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II
system is ready , and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation, you should have your vehicle
serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station
can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the
engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
7
AUTHORIZED DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. Either the range mark-
ings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a
crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one
quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the
range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of
the range marking.
Engine Oil Dipstick
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
7
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for information on this system.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recom-
mends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-
6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L and 2.7L
Engines
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.5L Engine
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operating
temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
7
Materials Added To Engine Oils
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-
ditives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-
ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. Mopar威 Engine Oil Filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Drive Belt
At the mileage indicated in section 8: “Maintenance
Schedule”, replace the drive belt with a new drive belt.
NOTE: The belt must be routed correctly to ensure
proper drive function.
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
this section for the proper type of spark plug for use in
your vehicle.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for engine air cleaner filter maintenance inter-
vals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road condi-
tions” maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
7
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine, and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when
the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any ignition coil connec-
tors disconnected for prolonged periods.
Maintenance-Free Battery
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment behind
the left front fender and is accessible without removing
the tire and wheel. Remote battery terminals are located
in the engine compartment for jump-starting.
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the inner fender shield.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
7
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion. Apply grease
to posts and clamps after tightening.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage as
battery damage can result.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, and Refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 of this
manual for A/C Air Filter service intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C Air Filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389
7
The A/C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to re-
place the filter:
1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the
door.
3. Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot
on the side of the box. This is done by grasping the
dampener connector (on the outside of the box) and the
end of the connector pin (on the inside of the box) with
your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while
lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand.
Once disconnected, the dampener will retract under-
neath the instrument panel if you release it.
4. Pivot the glove box downward.
5. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
6. Remove the A/C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
7. Install the A/C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
The A/C Air Filter is labeled with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to install the filter properly will result in the need to
replace it more often.
8. Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Front Suspension Ball Joints
There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are
permanently lubricated. Inspect these ball joints when
other maintenance is performed. A damaged seal and the
corresponding potentially damaged ball joint must be
replaced.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391
7
Steering Linkage
The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for
external leakage and damage when other maintenance is
performed.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including seat tracks,
door hinges, trunk hinges, and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism,
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock
cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non-abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Make sure that they are not frozen to the
glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the
blade.
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum
products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Always refer to the wiper blade packaging for
specific installation instructions. Many wiper blade re-
placements fit multiple vehicles.
Windshield Washers
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate “Engine Compartment”
diagram in Section 7 for the location of the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers is located
in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze)
and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have a competent technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393
7
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil
change or lubrication. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator is hot.
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for
any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and Refill
The system should be drained, flushed, and refilled at the
intervals shown in the “Maintenance Schedule” in Sec-
tion 8 of this manual.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant, refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for correct
coolant type.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395
7
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT
engine coolants, may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT
coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the speci-
fied coolant as soon as possible.
•
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol-base
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propy-
lene Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles (160
000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you
use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant:
•
The manufacturer recommends using Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F(⫺37° C)
are anticipated.
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald-
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397
7
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
4 Cylinder Engines — the coolant bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine idling and warm to normal
operating temperature, the level of the coolant in the
bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines,
shown on the bottle.
6 Cylinder Engines — the level of the coolant in the
pressurized coolant bottle should be between the
“COLD” and “FULL” range on the bottle when the
engine is cold.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month. When additional coolant is
needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added
to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
•
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine, which contains
aluminum components.
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
•
Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
7
Hoses and Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber
Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose rout-
ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
moving component that may cause heat damage or
mechanical wear.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of degradation that could cause failure.
Fuel System
Electronic Fuel Injection high-pressure fuel systems are
designed with tubes and special connects, connections,
and clamps which have unique material characteristics to
provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deterio-
rated gasoline.
You are urged to use only the manufactures-specified
tubes, connections and clamps, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the “Mainte-
nance Schedule” in this manual.
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake And Power Steering Hoses
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,
inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for
evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swell-
ing suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention
should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest
to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.
NOTE:
•
Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid, and
brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations
to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore,
oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not necessarily
an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot fluid
when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
operation) should be noted before a hose is replaced
based on leakage.
•
Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system is
serviced and at every engine oil change. Inspect hy-
draulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing, or
worn spots. If there is any evidence of cracking,
scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be replaced
immediately! Eventual deterioration of the hose can
take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401
7
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
ure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser-
voir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” for the correct
fluid type.
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
•
Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling
point than the recommended MOPAR 威 DOT 3
product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to
FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake
failure during hard prolonged braking. You could
have an accident.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the
brake fluid, all brake seal components could be
damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.
Automatic Transaxle
The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transaxle and the fluid.
Fluid Level Check — Vehicles with 3.5L Engine
The automatic transaxle has no dipstick and is dealer
serviced only.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403
7
Fluid Level Check — Vehicles with 2.4L and 2.7L
Engines
Use the following procedure to check the automatic
transaxle fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60
seconds.
3. Apply the parking brake fully.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in “P” (Park).
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate
the possibility of dirt entering the transaxle.
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180° F (82° C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is
driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held
comfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a
temperature below 80°F (27°C).
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Then,
remove dipstick and note the reading.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
two holes in the dipstick).
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid through the
filler (dipstick) tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not
overfill.
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” for the correct fluid type.
•
Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious
damage. To prevent dirt and water from entering
the transaxle after checking or replenishing fluid,
make certain that the dipstick cap is re-seated
properly.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter at the
intervals shown in the “Maintenance Schedule” in this
manual.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transaxle is
disassembled for any reason.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transaxle. The only exception to this policy is
the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In
addition, avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405
7
Front and Rear Wheel Bearings
Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these compo-
nents.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap, and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using Mopar威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
•
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
•
Use Mopar威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear
and open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407
7
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause, which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use Mopar威 touchup paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopar威
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only
Mopar威 or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products, which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with Mopar威 Total Clean, then
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Mopar威 Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary. Do
not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use Mopar威 Total
Clean to clean vinyl upholstery
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
Mopar威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
YES Essentials威 seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply Mopar威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409
7
•
For grease stains, apply Mopar威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
tials威 products.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments, which may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft tissue.
Cleaning The Center Console Cup Holders
Removal
Grab the rubber portion of the cup holder and lift
upward.
Cleaning
Soak the rubber cup holder liner in a mixture of medium
hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap.
Let soak for approximately one hour. After one hour pull
the liner from the water and dip it back into the water
about six times. This will loosen any remaining debris.
Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water.
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer
surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Align the liner in the cup holder and press down firmly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411
7
FUSES/TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE
(TIPM)
A Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This
center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label
that identifies each component may be printed on the
inside of the cover. Refer to the graphic below for
FUSES/TIPM location.
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
1
40 Amp
Green
——
2—
20 Amp
Yellow
—
Fuse and Relay Center (TIPM)
412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
3—
10 Amp
Red
Battery Feed — Center
High Mounted Stop
Light (CHMSL)/Brake
Switch
4—
10 Amp
Red
Battery Feed — Igni-
tion Switch
5—
20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow — If
Equipped
6—
10 Amp
Red
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) — Power Mirror
Switch/Climate Con-
trols
7—
30 Amp
Green
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Sense 1
8—
30 Amp
Green
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) Sense 2
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
9
40 Amp
Green
Battery Feed — Power
Seats - if equipped/
PZEV Air Pump - if
equipped
10 —
20 Amp
Yellow
Battery Feed — Cabin
Compartment Node
(CCN)
11 —
15 Amp
Lt Blue
Selectable Power Out-
let
12 —
20 Amp
Yellow
—
13 —
20 Amp
Yellow
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413
7
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
14 —
10 Amp
Red
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) — Cabin Com-
partment Node
(CCN)/ Interior Light-
ing
15
40 Amp
Green
—
Battery Feed — Radia-
tor Fan Relay
16 —
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
IGN Run/ACC — Ci-
gar Lighter/PWR Sun-
roof Mod
17 —
10 Amp
Red
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) — Wireless Con-
trol Module (WCM)/
Clock/Steering Control
Module (SCM)
18
40 Amp
Green
—
Battery Feed — Auto
Shutdown (ASD) Relay
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
19 —
20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) — Power Amp
Feed2-ifequipped
20 —
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
Ignition Off Draw
(IOD) — Radio
21 —
10 Amp
Red
—
22 —
10 Amp
Red
Ignition Run — Cli-
mate Controls/Hot
Cup Holder - if
equipped
23 —
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
Auto Shutdown (ASD)
Relay Feed 3
24 —
25 Amp
Clear
Battery Feed — PWR
Sunroof Feed
25 —
10 Amp
Red
Ignition Run — Heated
Mirrors - If Equipped
414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
26 —
15 Amp
Lt. Blue
Auto Shutdown (ASD)
Relay Feed 2
27 —
10 Amp
Red
Ignition Run — Occu-
pant Classification
Module (OCM)/
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
28 —
10 Amp
Red
Ignition Run — Occu-
pant Classification
Module (OCM)/
Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC)
29 — —
Hot Car (No Fuse Re-
quired)
30 —
20 Amp
Yellow
Ignition Run — Heated
Seats - If Equipped
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
31 —
10 Amp
Red
—
32
30 Amp
Pink
—
Auto Shutdown (ASD)
Relay Feed 1
33 —
10 Amp
Red
Battery Feed — Switch
Bank/Diagnostic Link
Connector/Powertrain
Control Module (PCM)
34
30 Amp
Pink
—
Battery Feed — Anti-
Lock Brakes (ABS)
Module - if equipped/
Electronic Stability Pro-
gram (ESP) Module - If
Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415
7
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini Fuse Description
35
40 Amp
Green
—
Battery Feed — Anti-
Lock Brakes (ABS)
Module - If Equipped/
Electronic Stability Pro-
gram (ESP) Module - If
Equipped
36
30 Amp
Pink
—
Battery Feed — Pas-
senger Door Module
(PDM)/Driver Door
Module (DDM)
37 —
25 Amp
Clear
—
CAUTION!
•
When installing the Totally Integrated Power
Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the Totally
Integrated Power Module, and possibly result in
an electrical system failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery. You may:
•
Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
•
Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights ..........578/W5W
Center Courtesy/Reading Lights .........578/W5W
Visor Vanity Lights .....................A6220
Glove Box Light .........................194
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number
Shift Indicator Light ................. JKLE14140
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Light .............579
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replace-
ment instructions.
LIGHTS BULBS — Outside Bulb No.
Low Beam Headlight .....................9006
High Beam Headlight..................... 9005
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Light . . . 3157AK
Front Fog Light .....................9145//H10
Center High Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL) ........................W16W(921)
Rear Tail/Stop......................... 3157K
Decklid Tail Light .......................T3.25
Rear Turn Signal ...................... 3157AK
Backup Light..........................3157K
License Light ...........................168
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417
7
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlight Bulb Replacement
1. Raise and prop open the hood. Locate the connector
behind the headlight.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner
filter housing and position the totally integrated power
module aside prior to replacing the low beam headlight
on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
2. Reach into engine compartment and from behind the
lamp assembly and grasp the connector.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the head light
housing due to access constraints. See “Head Light
Assembly Removal — Bulb Replacement” following this
procedure.
Headlight Housing - Rear View
418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Rotate bulb and connector one-quarter turn and pull
outward from assembly.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life.
1 — High Beam Headlight
2 — Low Beam Headlight
Twisting Bulb From Socket
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419
7
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb.
5. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
6. Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate
clockwise one-quarter turn to secure.
Head Light Assembly Removal — Bulb
Replacement
1. Raise and prop open the hood. Remove the headlight
mounting screws.
2. Remove the push-in fasteners by prying under the
head of the fasteners with a flat bladed tool.
Removing Halogen Bulb From Assembly
Mounting Screw Location
420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Gently pry the headlight assembly away from the
fender as shown in the picture. This will free the ball stud
from its retainer in the fender. Pull the headlight assem-
bly away from the vehicle.
4. Follow Steps 3 — 6 in the above “Headlight Bulb
Replacement” section.
5. Reinstall Head Light Assembly by reversing steps 2
and 3 above.
Gently Pry Out Headlight
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421
7
Front Turn Signal/Park Light
1. Raise and prop open the hood.
2. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the headlight hous-
ing.
3. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlight housing and rotate the connector one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.
Front Fog Light
NOTE: Access to the lights through the lower fascia
cutout is limited. We recommend you access the lights by
turning the steering wheel to allow access and remove
the inner fender shield.
Front Turn Signal/Park Light
422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the fog light hous-
ing.
2. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog
light housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
Front Fog Light
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423
7
Tail/Stop Light, Rear Turn Signal Light, Backup
Light
The taillights are a two piece design. The turn signal,
brake and taillights are located in the rear corner body
panel housing. The back up and taillights are located in
the trunk lid housing.
Changing the Tail/Stop Light or Rear Turn Signal
Light
1. Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner
behind the tail lamp
Split Taillight Assembly
Pull Back Trunk Liner
424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the taillight
housing.
3. Grasp the taillight housing and pull it firmly outward
while pushing gently on the studs from inside to disen-
gage the housing from the vehicle.
4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector one-
quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the
taillight housing.
Location Plastic Wing Nuts
1 — Tail/Stop Light
2 — Turn Signal Light
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425
7
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
taillight housing and rotate the connector one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the taillight housing.
Changing the Backup Light
1. Open the trunk.
2. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the housing.
Backup and Rear Fog Light
1 — Rear Fog Light
2 — Backup Light
426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
housing and rotate the connector one-quarter turn clock-
wise to lock it in place.
License Plate Light
1. Remove two retaining screws holding the light lens in
place.
2. Gently pry the lens loose.
3. Pull bulb from socket, replace and reattach the light
lens with the two retaining screws.
Location and Removal of Rear License Light Lens
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427
7
Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Rotate the bulb’s electrical connector one-quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the CHMSL hous-
ing.
3. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
CHMSL housing and rotate the connector one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.
High-mounted Stop Light Bulb Replacement
428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
Engine U.S. Metric
Fuel (approximate)
All FWD Engines — (Except 2.4L PZEV) 16.9 gallons 64 liters
2.4L PZEV (Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle) 18.4 gallons 69.7 liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 quarts 4.26 liters
2.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5.5 quarts 5.2 liters
3.5 Liter Engine (SAE 10W-30, API Certified) 5.5 quarts 5.2 liters
Cooling System *
2.4 Liter Engine (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile For-
mula) or equivalent.
7.7 quarts 7.3 liters
2.7 Liter Engine (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile For-
mula) or equivalent.
9.8 quarts 9.3 liters
3.5 Liter Engine (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile For-
mula) or equivalent.
11.6 quarts 11.0 liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
7
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant
Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
Engine Oil (2.4L & 2.7L)
Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 5W-20 is recommended. Refer to the en-
gine oil fill cap for the correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Mate-
rial Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil (3.5L)
Use API Certified engine oil. SAE 10W-30 is recommended. Refer to the
engine oil viscosity chart for the correct SAE grade meeting
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Oil Filter (2.4L) Mopar威 04884900AB or equivalent.
Oil Filter (2.7L & 3.5L) Mopar威 04884899AB or equivalent.
Spark Plugs (2.4L - EXCEPT PZEV*) ZFR5F-11 (Gap.043 in [1.11 mm])
Spark Plugs (2.4L— with PZEV ZFR5AP (Gap.031 in [0.8 mm])
Spark Plugs (2.7L) RE14PMC5 (Gap.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs (3.5L) ZFR5LP-13G (Gap.050 in [1.27 mm])
Fuel Selection (2.4L & 2.7L) 87 Octane
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
Fuel Selection (2.7L - EXCEPT CALI-
FORNIA EMISSION STATES)
E-85 Ethanol
Fuel Selection (3.5L) 87 to 89 Octane
* PZEV = Partial Zero Emission Vehicle
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
7
Chassis
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Automatic Transaxle Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder
Mopar威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emission control
system. These, and all other maintenance services in-
cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service should also be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 mi (805 km).
434 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil if
it has been six months since your last oil change even if
the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 mi (10 000 km) or six months, whichever
comes first.
Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after
completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil
change is performed by someone other than your dealer,
the message can be reset by referring to the steps described
under “Oil Change Required” under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual or
under “Odometer/Trip Odometer” under “Instrument
Cluster Descriptions” in Section 3 of this manual.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the SAFE or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering, and automatic trans-
axle, and add fluid as needed.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 435
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
NOTE: Six speed AutoStick威 Transaxle — if equipped is
sealed, therefore checking the fluid level can only be
done by a certified dealership service center.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Required Maintenance Intervals
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. 6,000 10 000 6
Rotate the tires. 6,000 10 000 6
If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions,
inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if nec-
essary.
12,000 20 000 12
Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary. 12,000 20 000 12
Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped). 12,000 20 000 12
Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at
12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months.
24,000 40 000 24
Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspec-
tion at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months.
24,000 40 000 24
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot
seals, and replace if necessary.
24,000 40 000 24
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. 30,000 50 000 30
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 437
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4L engines (except
PZEV* engine).
30,000 50 000 30
Inspect and adjust the power steering pump belt ten-
sion on 2.4L engines.
30,000 50 000 30
Inspect the generator belt on 2.4L engines, and replace
if necessary.
30,000 50 000 30
Change the automatic transaxle fluid & filter if using
your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
60,000 100 000 60
Inspect and replace the PCV valve if necessary. 90,000 150 000 90
Flush and replace the engine coolant. 100,000 160 000 60
Replace the spark plugs on 2.4L PZEV*, 2.7L and
3.5L engines.
102,000 170 000 102
Replace the power steering pump belt on 2.4L engines. 102,000 170 000 102
Replace the generator belt on 2.4L engines. 102,000 170 000 102
438 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
Replace the timing belt on 2.4L and 3.5L engines. 102,000 170 000 102
Change the automatic transaxle fluid & filter. 120,000 200 000 120
Replace the accessory drive belt on 2.7L engines. 120,000 200 000 120
*P artial Z ero E missions V ehicle
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 439
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle ..............................443
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ............443
▫ Prepare A List ........................443
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............443
䡵 If You Need Assistance ...................443
▫ DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation
Customer Center ......................444
▫ DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer
Center .............................444
▫ In Mexico Contact .....................444
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .............445
▫ Service Contract ......................445
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .....446
䡵 Mopar威 Parts .........................446
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects ..................446
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .....................446
▫ In Canada ..........................447
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to
your authorized selling dealer. They know you and your
vehicle best, and are most concerned that you get prompt
and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized
dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 443
9
special tools, and the latest information to ensure your
vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to your authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If your authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the Manufacturer’s Cus-
tomer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer
Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico: (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico: (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
444 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
er’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer
to your contract documents, and contact the person listed
in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your vehicle. Your authorized
dealer has also made a major investment in facilities,
tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely
delighted with your ownership experience. You’ll be
pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty
issues or related concerns.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 445
9
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your authorized dealer. They will help
you keep your vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
446 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to: Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, dia-
grams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 447
9
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
Call Toll Free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
•
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
448 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1-1/2 times as
well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart signifi-
cantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 449
9
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
450 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) .............. 282
Accessory Delay, Power ....................13
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........396
Adding Fuel ........................... 332
Adding Washer Fluid .................. 140,393
Additives, Fuel .........................326
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 385
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............... 388
Air Conditioning ........................243
Air Conditioning Controls ................. 243
Air Conditioning Filter .................256,389
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............ 257
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ............. 388,389
Air Conditioning System ............. 243,248,388
Air Pressure, Tires .......................304
Airbag .............................. 52,61
Airbag Deployment ....................... 62
Airbag Light ................... 53,60,65,79,173
Airbag Maintenance .......................64
Airbag, Side ........................54,59,61
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ........... 55,59,61
Alarm (Security Alarm) ....................18
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ............ 18,173
Alignment and Balance ...................312
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ............. 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................235
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........... 395,396,429
Disposal ............................398
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............. 282
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................282
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........ 18
Appearance Care ........................406
Ashtray ...............................156
Assistance Towing .......................102
Audio Systems (Radio) ................. 222,225
Auto Down Power Windows ................35
Auto Unlock, Doors .......................32
Auto Up Power Windows ................36,153
452 INDEX
Automatic Dimming Mirror .................86
Automatic Door Locks ...................31,32
Automatic Oil Change Indicator ........ 175,185,434
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......... 248
Automatic Transaxle ..............13,264,270,403
Adding Fluid ................... 403,404,432
Filter ............................... 405
Fluid and Filter Changes ................. 405
Fluid Level Check ...................403,404
Interlock System ....................... 272
Reset Mode ..........................275
Selection Of Lubricant ................... 432
Shifting .............................273
Special Additives ......................405
Autostick .............................275
Back-Up Lights .........................424
BallJoints .............................391
Battery ............................... 387
Gas Caution .......................... 387
Jump Starting .........................29
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......25
Location ............................387
Bearings ..............................406
Belts,Drive ............................384
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............392
B-Pillar Location ........................299
Brake Assist System ...................... 286
Brake, Parking .......................... 277
Brake System ........................ 281,400
Anti-Lock (ABS) ....................... 282
Fluid Check .......................402,432
Hoses ..............................401
Master Cylinder ....................... 402
Parking .............................277
Warning Light ........................ 178
Brakes ............................. 281,400
Brake/Transmission Interlock ............... 272
INDEX 453
10
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........78
Bulb Replacement .....................417,418
Bulbs,Light ............................417
Calibration, Compass ..................... 188
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .........20
Capacities, Fluid ........................429
Caps, Filler
Fuel ................................332
Oil (Engine) .................. 374,375,376,383
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...............397
Car Washes ............................ 407
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................327
Cargo Area Features ......................162
Cargo Compartment ......................162
Cargo Load Floor ........................162
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ...................162
Catalytic Converter ......................385
Caution, Exhaust Gas ...................... 78
CD (Compact Disc) Player ...............222,225
CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance ........ 242
Cellular Phone .................. 89,225,227,242
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............ 428
Chains, Tire ............................ 312
Changing A Flat Tire ..................... 356
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................ 296
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ...............378
Child Restraint ....................67,69,73,76
Child Restraint Tether Anchors ............. 71,73
Child Safety Locks ........................33
Cigar Lighter ...........................156
Clean Air Gasoline ....................... 324
Cleaning
Wheels ............................. 408
Windshield Wiper Blades .................392
Climate Control ......................... 243
Clock ..................... 193,196,208,224,227
454 INDEX
CoinHolder ...........................157
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............242
Compact Spare Tire ...................... 307
Compass .............................. 187
Compass Calibration ..................... 188
Compass Variance .......................189
Computer, Trip/Travel .................. 20,186
Connector
UCI ................................229
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ......... 229
Console ............................129,157
Console, Floor ....................... 129,157
Contract, Service ........................ 445
Converter, Catalytic ...................... 385
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..........397
Cooling System .........................394
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .............. 396
Coolant Capacity ......................429
Coolant Level ...................... 395,398
Disposal of Used Coolant ................ 398
Drain, Flush, and Refill .................. 395
Inspection ........................... 398
Points to Remember ....................398
Pressure Cap .........................397
Radiator Cap ......................... 397
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......395,429,430
Corrosion Protection ..................... 406
Crankcase Ventilation Module ............... 20
CruiseLight ...........................176
CupHolder ...................... 129,160,411
Customer Assistance .....................443
Customer Programmable Features ............190
Data Recorder, Event ......................65
Dealer Service .......................... 380
Deck Lid, Power Release ...................38
Defroster, Rear Window ...................258
Defroster, Windshield ............. 80,245,246,252
INDEX 455
10
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ............... 29,138
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................377
Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player ..........222,225
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................136
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle .................403,404
Oil (Engine) ..........................380
Disabled Vehicle Towing ...................368
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............... 398
Engine Oil ...........................384
Door Locks, Automatic ....................31
Door Opener, Garage .....................144
DriveBelts ............................384
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ....................291
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water ................................ 292
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) ...... 240
E-85 Fuel .............................328
Electric Rear Window Defrost ............... 258
Electric Remote Mirrors .................... 87
Electrical Power Outlets ...................154
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 141
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............ 287
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ....183
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking .............................356
Jump Starting .........................364
Towing .............................368
Emergency Trunk Release .................39,40
Emission Control System Maintenance ...... 378,434
Engine ........................78,374,375,376
Air Cleaner ..........................385
Block Heater .........................269
Break-In Recommendations ................ 78
Checking Oil Level .....................380
Coolant (Antifreeze) ................. 395,430
456 INDEX
Cooling .............................394
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................327
Fuel Requirements ..................323,429
Jump Starting .........................364
Oil ........................... 380,429,430
Oil Change Interval ............ 175,185,382,434
Oil Filler Cap .................374,375,376,383
OilFilter ............................384
Oil Filter Disposal ...................... 384
Oil Selection ....................... 382,429
Oil Synthetic ......................... 383
Operation ............................78
Overheating ..........................353
Temperature Gauge ..................... 172
Engine Oil Viscosity ...................... 383
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........62
Entry System, Illuminated ..................20
Ethanol ...............................324
Event Data Recorder ...................... 65
Exhaust Gas Caution ................78,327,394
Exhaust System ......................... 393
Extender, Seat Belt ........................51
Fabric Care ......................... 408,409
Filler Location Fuel .................... 172,332
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................385
Air Conditioning .................... 256,389
Automatic Transaxle ....................405
Engine Oil ........................384,430
Engine Oil Disposal .................... 384
Flashers .............................. 353
Hazard Warning ....................... 353
Flash-To-Pass ........................... 134
Flat Tire Stowage ........................363
Flexible Fuel Vehicles .....................328
Cruising Range ........................ 331
Engine Oil ...........................330
INDEX 457
10
Fuel Requirements ..................328,329
Maintenance .......................328,331
Replacement Parts .....................331
Starting ............................. 331
Flooded Engine Starting ................... 266
Floor Console .......................... 157
Fluid Capacities .........................429
Fluid Leaks .............................80
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle .................403,404
Brake ............................ 402,432
Cooling System ....................... 395
Engine Oil ...........................380
Power Steering .....................391,432
Fluids ................................430
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .......... 430
Fog Light Service ........................ 422
Fog Lights ....................... 134,179,422
Folding Rear Seat ..................... 128,129
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................367
Front Wheel Bearings ..................... 406
Fuel ................................. 323
Adding ............................. 332
Additives ............................ 326
CleanAir ............................ 324
Ethanol .............................324
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................172,332
Filler Door (Gas Cap) ...................172
Gasoline ............................ 323
Gauge .............................. 172
Hoses ..............................400
Light ...............................173
Materials Added ....................... 326
Methanol ............................ 324
Octane Rating ......................323,430
Requirements ...................... 323,429
Tank Capacity ........................429
Fuel, Flexible ............. See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
458 INDEX
Fuel System Caution .....................333
Fueling ...............................332
Fuses ................................ 412
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ...........144
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............ 332,334,377
Gasoline, Clean Air ...................... 324
Gasoline (Fuel) ......................... 323
Gasoline, Reformulated ................... 324
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .................... 172
Fuel ................................172
Odometer ........................... 174
Tachometer ..........................174
Gearshift ..............................273
General Information .................18,116,322
General Maintenance .....................380
Glass Cleaning .......................... 410
Gross Axle Weight Rating ............... 336,339
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .............336,338
GVWR ............................... 336
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) ........89,225,227
Hard Drive (HDD) .................... 222,225
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ......................... 292
Hazard Warning Flasher ................... 353
Head Restraints .........................125
Headlights ............................418
Bulb Replacement ......................418
Cleaning ............................ 410
High Beam ........................ 136,182
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........136
On With Wipers ....................... 139
Passing ............................. 134
Replacing ............................418
Switch ..............................132
INDEX 459
10
Heated Seats ...........................126
Heater ............................... 243
Heater, Engine Block .....................269
Hitches
TrailerTowing ........................340
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 144
Hood Prop ............................ 131
Hood Release ..........................130
Hoses ................................ 400
Ignition ............................... 13
Key ............................... 12,13
Lock ................................13
Ignition Key Removal .....................13
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................... 15
Infant Restraint ...................... 67,68,69
Information Center, Vehicle ................. 183
Inside Rearview Mirror .................... 85
Instrument Cluster .................170,171,172
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............169
Instrument Panel Cover ................... 408
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............410
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............412
Interior Appearance Care .................. 408
Interior Lights ..........................131
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ........... 138
Introduction ............................. 4
Jack Location ...........................356
Jack Operation ....................... 356,358
Jacking Instructions ...................... 358
Jump Starting .......................... 364
Key, Programming ........................17
Key, Replacement ........................16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ................... 15
Key-In Reminder ......................... 14
460 INDEX
Keyless Entry System ......................21
Keyless Entry System (Sedan) ................ 21
Keys .................................12
Knee Bolster .......................... 52,53
Lane Change and Turn Signals ..............179
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................... 42
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . 73
Latches
Hood ............................... 130
Lead Free Gasoline ......................323
LifeofTires ............................309
LightBulbs ............................ 417
Lights ..............................80,131
Airbag ........................ 53,65,79,173
Back-Up .............................424
Brake Warning ........................ 178
Bulb Replacement ......................418
Center Mounted Stop ...................428
Daytime Running ......................134
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 287
Engine Temperature Warning .............. 174
Fog ..........................134,179,422
Headlight Switch ...................... 132
Headlights ........................... 132
Headlights On With Wipers ...............139
High Beam Indicator ....................182
Illuminated Entry ....................... 20
Instrument Cluster .....................132
Interior ............................. 131
License ............................. 427
Lights On Reminder .................... 134
Low Fuel ............................ 173
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........ 182
Map Reading .........................131
Oil Pressure .......................... 173
Passing ............................. 134
Rear Tail ............................ 424
INDEX 461
10
Seat Belt Reminder ..................... 173
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ..............19
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .............. 173
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...........314
Traction Control .......................287
Turn Signal ..................135,179,422,424
Voltage .............................173
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ..... 172
Loading Vehicle ......................335,337
Capacities ........................... 337
Tires ...............................299
Locks
Auto Unlock .......................... 32
Child Protection ........................33
Power Door ........................... 31
Low Tire Pressure System .................. 314
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) .............................. 73
Lubrication, Body .......................392
Lumbar Support ........................124
Maintenance Free Battery .................. 387
Maintenance, General ..................... 380
Maintenance Procedures ................... 380
Maintenance Schedule ....................434
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 182,378
Manual, Service ......................... 447
Map/Reading Lights .....................131
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ..................402
Methanol ............................. 324
Mini-Trip Computer ...................... 186
Mirrors ................................ 85
Automatic Dimming ..................... 86
Electric Powered ....................... 87
Outside .............................. 88
Rearview ............................. 85
Vanity ............................... 89
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ............. 7
462 INDEX
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............314
Mopar Parts .........................379,446
MP3 Player ......................... 222,225
MTBE/ETBE ........................... 324
Navigation Radio ........................ 225
Navigation System .......................225
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 78
Occupant Restraints ..................... 59,62
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ......... 40,54,55,59,61
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .............. 323
Odometer .............................174
Trip ............................. 174,176
Oil Change Indicator ................175,185,434
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..............175,185
Oil, Engine ......................... 380,430
Capacity ............................429
Change Interval ............... 175,185,382,434
Checking ............................ 380
Dipstick ............................. 380
Disposal ............................ 384
Filter ............................ 384,430
Filter Disposal ........................384
Identification Logo .....................382
Materials Added to ..................... 384
Recommendation ................... 382,429
Synthetic ............................383
Viscosity ..........................383,429
Oil Filter, Change ........................ 384
Oil Filter, Selection .......................384
Oil Pressure Light ....................... 173
Onboard Diagnostic System .............. 377,378
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ........... 144
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Overdrive ............................. 274
Overheating, Engine ...................... 353
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ......... 4,447
INDEX 463
10
PaintCare ............................. 406
Panic Alarm ............................ 25
Parking Brake .......................... 277
Parking On Hill .........................278
Passing Light ...........................134
Personal Settings ........................190
Pets .................................. 77
Phone, Cellular .................... 89,225,227
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) ........89,225,227
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ......... 299
Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) .............222,225
USB .............................222,225
Power
Accessory Delay ........................ 13
Deck Lid Release ....................... 38
Distribution Center (Fuses) ............... 412
Door Locks ...........................31
Mirrors ..............................87
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........154
Seats ...............................124
Steering ............................. 290
Steering, Checking .....................391
Sunroof ............................. 151
Windows ............................. 34
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 391
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............51
Preparation for Jacking .................... 357
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .............................48
Programmable Electronic Features ............ 190
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................25
Radial Ply Tires ......................... 306
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ..........397
Radio Broadcast Signals ................... 193
Radio, Navigation .......................225
464 INDEX
Radio Operation ...................223,226,242
Radio, Satellite .............. 222,223,225,227,234
Radio (Sound Systems) ................. 222,225
Rear Cup Holder ........................161
Rear Seat, Folding .................... 128,129
Rear Wheel Bearings .....................406
Rear Window Defroster ................... 258
Rear Window Features .................... 258
Rearview Mirrors ........................ 85
Recorder, Event Data ......................65
Recreational Towing ................... 349,369
Reformulated Gasoline ....................324
Refrigerant ............................389
Reminder, Seat Belt ....................... 49
Remote Control
Door Locks ...........................21
Security Alarm .........................18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................21
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) ............... 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........238
Remote Starting System ....................27
Remote Trunk Release ..................... 38
Replacement Bulbs .......................417
Replacement Keys ........................ 16
Replacement Parts ....................... 379
Replacement Tires ....................... 310
Reporting Safety Defects ................... 446
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ...........175,185
Restraint, Head ......................... 125
Restraints, Child ......................... 67
Restraints, Infant ......................... 68
Reverse Lights .......................... 424
Rotation, Tires ..........................313
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ................. 79
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ............... 80
Safety Defects, Reporting .................. 446
Safety Information, Tire ...................294
INDEX 465
10
Safety Tips ............................. 78
Satellite Radio ...............222,223,225,227,234
Satellite Radio Antenna ................... 235
Schedule, Maintenance .................... 434
Seat Belt Maintenance ..................... 411
Seat Belt Reminder ....................... 49
Seat Belts
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ..................48
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........ 48
And Pregnant Women ................... 51
Child Restraint ....................... 67,76
Extender ............................. 51
Front Seat .......................... 42,43
Operating Instructions ................... 43
Pretensioners ..........................48
Rear Seat ............................. 42
Reminder ............................173
Untwisting Procedure ....................47
Seat Belts (Sedan) ........................40
Seats .................................121
Adjustment .......................... 121
Cleaning .........................129,409
Head Restraints ....................... 125
Heated ............................. 126
Lumbar Support ....................... 124
Power .............................. 124
Rear Folding ....................... 128,129
Rear Folding (Sedan) ....................162
Reclining ............................123
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................ 18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........395,430
Selection of Oil ......................... 382
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................... 15
Sentry Key Programming ................... 17
Service Assistance ....................... 443
Service Contract ......................... 445
Service Manuals ........................ 447
Setting the Clock .............193,196,208,224,227
466 INDEX
Settings, Personal ........................190
Shoulder Belts ........................... 42
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) .......... 255
Signals, Turn ........................... 424
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ...............291
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................312
Snow Tires ............................312
Sound Systems (Radio) ................. 222,225
Spare Tire ..........................307,356
Spark Plugs ............................385
Specifications
Oil ................................382
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...........141,176
Speedometer ........................... 172
Starting ............................... 264
Engine Fails to Start ....................266
Starting Procedures ......................264
Steering
Linkage .............................392
Power ........................... 290,391
TiltColumn ..........................140
Wheel, Tilt ...........................140
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ..............................238
Storage ............................162,417
Storage, Vehicle .........................255
Stuck, Freeing ..........................367
Sun Roof .............................. 151
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........52
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................383
System, Navigation ......................225
Tachometer ............................ 174
Taillights .............................. 424
Telescoping Steering Column ............... 140
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........ 248
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......172,354
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ............... 71
INDEX 467
10
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................ 18
Theft System (Security Alarm) ...............18
Tilt Steering Column .....................140
Time Delay, Headlight .................... 133
Tip Start ..............................266
Tire and Loading Information Placard .........299
Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............. 298
Tire Markings ..........................294
Tire Safety Information .................... 294
Tires ............................80,303,449
Aging(LifeofTires) ....................309
Air Pressure ..........................303
Alignment ...........................312
Chains ..............................312
Changing ............................356
Compact Spare ........................ 307
Flat Changing ........................ 363
General Information .................... 303
High Speed ..........................305
Inflation Pressures .....................304
Jacking .............................356
LifeofTires .......................... 309
Load Capacity ..................... 299,300
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...........314
Quality Grading ....................... 449
Radial .............................. 306
Replacement ......................... 310
Rotation .............................313
Safety ........................... 294,303
Sizes ...............................296
Snow Tires ........................... 312
Spare Tire ........................... 356
Spinning ............................308
Tread Wear Indicators ................... 309
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............342
Towing ............................... 338
24-Hour Towing Assistance ...............102
Disabled Vehicle ....................... 368
468 INDEX
Guide ..............................341
Recreational ....................... 349,369
Weight .............................. 341
Towing Assistance ....................... 102
Traction ..............................292
TrailerTowing ..........................338
Cooling System Tips .................... 349
Hitches ............................. 340
Minimum Requirements .................343
Trailer and Tongue Weight ................342
Wiring ..............................346
TrailerTowingGuide .....................341
TrailerWeight ..........................341
Transaxle .............................270
Additives ............................ 405
Automatic .................... 13,264,270,403
Autostick ............................ 275
Filter ............................... 405
Maintenance ..........................403
Operation ........................... 270
Overdrive ........................... 274
Selection of Lubricant ................... 432
Transmission
Range Indicator ....................... 174
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 144
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................25
Transporting Pets ........................ 77
Tread Wear Indicators ....................309
Trip Odometer ..........................174
Trip Odometer Reset Button ................ 176
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ...................... 38
Trunk Release, Emergency ................39,40
Trunk Release Remote Control ...............38
Turn Signals ...................... 135,179,424
INDEX 469
10
UCI Connector .........................229
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ........... 89,225
Understanding Your Instrument Panel ......... 169
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 449
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 229
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port ........... 222,225
Universal Transmitter ..................... 144
Unleaded Gasoline .......................323
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .............. 47
Upholstery Care ........................408
USB Port ...........................222,225
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses .................400
VanityMirrors...........................89
Variance, Compass .......................189
Vehicle Certification Label ................. 335
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............ 6
Vehicle Loading ...................300,335,337
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .............. 7
Vehicle Storage ....................... 255,417
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .......... 18
Video Entertainment System
(Rear Seat Video System) ..................240
Viscosity, Engine Oil ...................... 383
Voice Recognition System (VR) .............. 116
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) .............172
Warnings and Cautions ..................... 6
Warranty Information .....................446
Washer, Adding Fluid ..................140,393
Washers, Windshield ................ 136,140,393
Washing Vehicle ......................... 407
Water
Driving Through ...................... 292
Wheel Alignment and Balance ............... 312
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................408
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................408
470 INDEX
Wheel Bearings .........................406
Wind Buffeting .......................38,153
Window Fogging ........................ 255
Windows ..............................34
Power ............................... 34
Windshield Defroster ............... 245,246,252
Windshield Washers ................... 136,140
Fluid ...............................393
Windshield Wiper Blades .................. 392
Windshield Wipers .......................136
Wiper Blade Replacement ...............392,393
Wipers, Intermittent ...................... 138
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure ...... 409
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) .............. 282
Accessory Delay, Power ....................13
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........396
Adding Fuel ........................... 332
Adding Washer Fluid .................. 140,393
Additives, Fuel .........................326
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 385
Air Conditioner Maintenance ............... 388
Air Conditioning ........................243
Air Conditioning Controls ................. 243
Air Conditioning Filter .................256,389
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............ 257
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ............. 388,389
Air Conditioning System ............. 243,248,388
Air Pressure, Tires .......................304
Airbag .............................. 52,61
Airbag Deployment ....................... 62
Airbag Light ................... 53,60,65,79,173
Airbag Maintenance .......................64
Airbag, Side ........................54,59,61
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ........... 55,59,61
Alarm (Security Alarm) ....................18
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ............ 18,173
INDEX 471
10
Alignment and Balance ................... 312
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ............. 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................235
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........... 395,396,429
Disposal ............................ 398
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............. 282
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................282
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........ 18
Appearance Care ........................406
Ashtray ...............................156
Assistance Towing .......................102
Audio Systems (Radio) ................. 222,225
Auto Down Power Windows ................35
Auto Unlock, Doors .......................32
Auto Up Power Windows ................36,153
Automatic Dimming Mirror .................86
Automatic Door Locks ...................31,32
Automatic Oil Change Indicator ........ 175,185,434
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......... 248
Automatic Transaxle ..............13,264,270,403
Adding Fluid ................... 403,404,432
Filter ............................... 405
Fluid and Filter Changes ................. 405
Fluid Level Check ...................403,404
Interlock System ....................... 272
Reset Mode ..........................275
Selection Of Lubricant ................... 432
Shifting .............................273
Special Additives ......................405
Autostick ............................. 275
Back-Up Lights .........................424
BallJoints .............................391
Battery ............................... 387
Gas Caution .......................... 387
Jump Starting ......................... 29
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......25
Location ............................387
472 INDEX
Bearings ..............................406
Belts,Drive ............................384
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............392
B-Pillar Location ........................299
Brake Assist System ...................... 286
Brake, Parking .......................... 277
Brake System ........................ 281,400
Anti-Lock (ABS) ....................... 282
Fluid Check .......................402,432
Hoses ..............................401
Master Cylinder ....................... 402
Parking .............................277
Warning Light ........................ 178
Brakes ............................. 281,400
Brake/Transmission Interlock ............... 272
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........78
Bulb Replacement .....................417,418
Bulbs,Light ............................417
Calibration, Compass ..................... 188
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .........20
Capacities, Fluid ........................429
Caps, Filler
Fuel ................................332
Oil (Engine) .................. 374,375,376,383
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ...............397
Car Washes ............................ 407
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................327
Cargo Area Features ......................162
Cargo Compartment ......................162
Cargo Load Floor ........................162
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) ...................162
Catalytic Converter ......................385
Caution, Exhaust Gas ...................... 78
CD (Compact Disc) Player ...............222,225
CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance ........ 242
Cellular Phone .................. 89,225,227,242
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............ 428
INDEX 473
10
Chains, Tire ............................ 312
Changing A Flat Tire ..................... 356
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................ 296
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ...............378
Child Restraint ....................67,69,73,76
Child Restraint Tether Anchors ............. 71,73
Child Safety Locks ........................33
Cigar Lighter ...........................156
Clean Air Gasoline ....................... 324
Cleaning
Wheels ............................. 408
Windshield Wiper Blades .................392
Climate Control ......................... 243
Clock ..................... 193,196,208,224,227
CoinHolder ...........................157
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............242
Compact Spare Tire ...................... 307
Compass .............................. 187
Compass Calibration ..................... 188
Compass Variance .......................189
Computer, Trip/Travel .................. 20,186
Connector
UCI ................................229
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ......... 229
Console ............................129,157
Console, Floor ....................... 129,157
Contract, Service ........................ 445
Converter, Catalytic ...................... 385
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..........397
Cooling System .........................394
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .............. 396
Coolant Capacity ......................429
Coolant Level ...................... 395,398
Disposal of Used Coolant ................ 398
Drain, Flush, and Refill .................. 395
Inspection ........................... 398
Points to Remember ....................398
474 INDEX
Pressure Cap .........................397
Radiator Cap ......................... 397
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......395,429,430
Corrosion Protection ..................... 406
Crankcase Ventilation Module ............... 20
CruiseLight ...........................176
CupHolder ...................... 129,160,411
Customer Assistance .....................443
Customer Programmable Features ............190
Data Recorder, Event ......................65
Dealer Service .......................... 380
Deck Lid, Power Release ...................38
Defroster, Rear Window ...................258
Defroster, Windshield ............. 80,245,246,252
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ............... 29,138
Diagnostic System, Onboard ................377
Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player ..........222,225
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................136
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle .................403,404
Oil (Engine) ..........................380
Disabled Vehicle Towing ...................368
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............... 398
Engine Oil ...........................384
Door Locks, Automatic .................... 31
Door Opener, Garage .....................144
DriveBelts ............................384
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces ....................291
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water ................................ 292
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) ...... 240
E-85 Fuel .............................328
Electric Rear Window Defrost ............... 258
Electric Remote Mirrors .................... 87
INDEX 475
10
Electrical Power Outlets ...................154
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 141
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............ 287
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ....183
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking .............................356
Jump Starting .........................364
Towing .............................368
Emergency Trunk Release .................39,40
Emission Control System Maintenance ...... 378,434
Engine ........................78,374,375,376
Air Cleaner ..........................385
Block Heater .........................269
Break-In Recommendations ................ 78
Checking Oil Level .....................380
Coolant (Antifreeze) ................. 395,430
Cooling .............................394
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................327
Fuel Requirements .................. 323,429
Jump Starting .........................364
Oil ........................... 380,429,430
Oil Change Interval ............ 175,185,382,434
Oil Filler Cap .................374,375,376,383
OilFilter ............................384
Oil Filter Disposal ...................... 384
Oil Selection ....................... 382,429
Oil Synthetic ......................... 383
Operation ............................78
Overheating ..........................353
Temperature Gauge ..................... 172
Engine Oil Viscosity ...................... 383
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........62
Entry System, Illuminated ..................20
Ethanol ...............................324
Event Data Recorder ...................... 65
Exhaust Gas Caution ................78,327,394
Exhaust System ......................... 393
Extender, Seat Belt ........................51
476 INDEX
Fabric Care ......................... 408,409
Filler Location Fuel .................... 172,332
Filters
Air Cleaner ..........................385
Air Conditioning .................... 256,389
Automatic Transaxle ....................405
Engine Oil ........................384,430
Engine Oil Disposal .................... 384
Flashers .............................. 353
Hazard Warning ....................... 353
Flash-To-Pass ........................... 134
Flat Tire Stowage ........................363
Flexible Fuel Vehicles .....................328
Cruising Range ........................ 331
Engine Oil ...........................330
Fuel Requirements .................. 328,329
Maintenance .......................328,331
Replacement Parts .....................331
Starting ............................. 331
Flooded Engine Starting ................... 266
Floor Console .......................... 157
Fluid Capacities .........................429
Fluid Leaks .............................80
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle .................403,404
Brake ............................ 402,432
Cooling System ....................... 395
Engine Oil ...........................380
Power Steering .....................391,432
Fluids ................................430
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .......... 430
Fog Light Service ........................ 422
Fog Lights ....................... 134,179,422
Folding Rear Seat ..................... 128,129
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................367
Front Wheel Bearings ..................... 406
Fuel ................................. 323
Adding ............................. 332
INDEX 477
10
Additives ............................ 326
CleanAir ............................ 324
Ethanol .............................324
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................172,332
Filler Door (Gas Cap) ...................172
Gasoline ............................ 323
Gauge .............................. 172
Hoses ..............................400
Light ...............................173
Materials Added ....................... 326
Methanol ............................ 324
Octane Rating ......................323,430
Requirements ...................... 323,429
Tank Capacity ........................429
Fuel, Flexible ............. See Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel System Caution .....................333
Fueling ...............................332
Fuses ................................ 412
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) ...........144
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............ 332,334,377
Gasoline, Clean Air ...................... 324
Gasoline (Fuel) ......................... 323
Gasoline, Reformulated ................... 324
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .................... 172
Fuel ................................172
Odometer ........................... 174
Tachometer ..........................174
Gearshift ..............................273
General Information .................18,116,322
General Maintenance .....................380
Glass Cleaning .......................... 410
GrossAxleWeightRating ............... 336,339
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .............336,338
GVWR ............................... 336
478 INDEX
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) ........89,225,227
Hard Drive (HDD) .................... 222,225
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ......................... 292
Hazard Warning Flasher ................... 353
Head Restraints .........................125
Headlights ............................418
Bulb Replacement ......................418
Cleaning ............................ 410
High Beam ........................ 136,182
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........136
On With Wipers ....................... 139
Passing ............................. 134
Replacing ............................418
Switch ..............................132
Heated Seats ...........................126
Heater ............................... 243
Heater, Engine Block .....................269
Hitches
TrailerTowing ........................340
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 144
Hood Prop ............................ 131
Hood Release ..........................130
Hoses ................................ 400
Ignition ............................... 13
Key ............................... 12,13
Lock ................................13
Ignition Key Removal .....................13
Illuminated Entry ........................20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................... 15
Infant Restraint ...................... 67,68,69
Information Center, Vehicle ................. 183
Inside Rearview Mirror .................... 85
Instrument Cluster .................170,171,172
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............169
Instrument Panel Cover ................... 408
INDEX 479
10
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............410
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............412
Interior Appearance Care .................. 408
Interior Lights ..........................131
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ........... 138
Introduction ............................. 4
Jack Location ...........................356
Jack Operation ....................... 356,358
Jacking Instructions ...................... 358
Jump Starting .......................... 364
Key, Programming ........................17
Key, Replacement ........................16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ................... 15
Key-In Reminder ......................... 14
Keyless Entry System ......................21
Keyless Entry System (Sedan) ................ 21
Keys .................................12
Knee Bolster .......................... 52,53
Lane Change and Turn Signals ..............179
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................... 42
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . 73
Latches
Hood ............................... 130
Lead Free Gasoline ...................... 323
LifeofTires ............................309
LightBulbs ............................ 417
Lights ..............................80,131
Airbag ........................ 53,65,79,173
Back-Up .............................424
Brake Warning ........................ 178
Bulb Replacement ......................418
Center Mounted Stop ...................428
Daytime Running ......................134
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 287
Engine Temperature Warning .............. 174
480 INDEX
Fog ..........................134,179,422
Headlight Switch ...................... 132
Headlights ........................... 132
Headlights On With Wipers ...............139
High Beam Indicator ....................182
Illuminated Entry ....................... 20
Instrument Cluster .....................132
Interior ............................. 131
License ............................. 427
Lights On Reminder .................... 134
Low Fuel ............................ 173
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........ 182
Map Reading .........................131
Oil Pressure .......................... 173
Passing ............................. 134
Rear Tail ............................ 424
Seat Belt Reminder ..................... 173
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ..............19
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .............. 173
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...........314
Traction Control .......................287
Turn Signal ..................135,179,422,424
Voltage .............................173
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ..... 172
Loading Vehicle ......................335,337
Capacities ........................... 337
Tires ...............................299
Locks
AutoUnlock .......................... 32
Child Protection ........................33
Power Door ........................... 31
Low Tire Pressure System .................. 314
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) .............................. 73
Lubrication, Body .......................392
Lumbar Support ........................124
Maintenance Free Battery .................. 387
INDEX 481
10
Maintenance, General ..................... 380
Maintenance Procedures ................... 380
Maintenance Schedule ....................434
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 182,378
Manual, Service ......................... 447
Map/Reading Lights .....................131
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ..................402
Methanol ............................. 324
Mini-Trip Computer ...................... 186
Mirrors ................................ 85
Automatic Dimming ..................... 86
Electric Powered ....................... 87
Outside .............................. 88
Rearview ............................. 85
Vanity ............................... 89
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ............. 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............314
Mopar Parts .........................379,446
MP3 Player ......................... 222,225
MTBE/ETBE ........................... 324
Navigation Radio ........................ 225
Navigation System .......................225
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 78
Occupant Restraints ..................... 59,62
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ......... 40,54,55,59,61
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .............. 323
Odometer .............................174
Trip ............................. 174,176
Oil Change Indicator ................175,185,434
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..............175,185
Oil, Engine ......................... 380,430
Capacity ............................429
Change Interval ............... 175,185,382,434
Checking ............................ 380
Dipstick ............................. 380
Disposal ............................ 384
482 INDEX
Filter ............................ 384,430
Filter Disposal ........................384
Identification Logo .....................382
Materials Added to ..................... 384
Recommendation ................... 382,429
Synthetic ............................383
Viscosity ..........................383,429
Oil Filter, Change ........................ 384
Oil Filter, Selection .......................384
Oil Pressure Light ....................... 173
Onboard Diagnostic System .............. 377,378
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ........... 144
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Overdrive ............................. 274
Overheating, Engine ...................... 353
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ......... 4,447
PaintCare ............................. 406
Panic Alarm ............................ 25
Parking Brake .......................... 277
Parking On Hill .........................278
Passing Light ...........................134
Personal Settings ........................190
Pets .................................. 77
Phone, Cellular .................... 89,225,227
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) ........89,225,227
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ......... 299
Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) .............222,225
USB .............................222,225
Power
Accessory Delay ........................ 13
Deck Lid Release ....................... 38
Distribution Center (Fuses) ............... 412
Door Locks ...........................31
Mirrors ..............................87
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........154
Seats ...............................124
INDEX 483
10
Steering ............................. 290
Steering, Checking .....................391
Sunroof ............................. 151
Windows ............................. 34
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 391
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............51
Preparation for Jacking .................... 357
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .............................48
Programmable Electronic Features ............ 190
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................25
Radial Ply Tires ......................... 306
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ..........397
Radio Broadcast Signals ................... 193
Radio, Navigation .......................225
Radio Operation ...................223,226,242
Radio, Satellite .............. 222,223,225,227,234
Radio (Sound Systems) ................. 222,225
Rear Cup Holder ........................161
Rear Seat, Folding .................... 128,129
Rear Wheel Bearings .....................406
Rear Window Defroster ................... 258
Rear Window Features .................... 258
Rearview Mirrors ........................ 85
Recorder, Event Data ......................65
Recreational Towing ................... 349,369
Reformulated Gasoline ....................324
Refrigerant ............................389
Reminder, Seat Belt ....................... 49
Remote Control
Door Locks ...........................21
Security Alarm .........................18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................21
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) ............... 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........238
Remote Starting System ....................27
484 INDEX
Remote Trunk Release ..................... 38
Replacement Bulbs .......................417
Replacement Keys ........................ 16
Replacement Parts ....................... 379
Replacement Tires ....................... 310
Reporting Safety Defects ................... 446
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ...........175,185
Restraint, Head ......................... 125
Restraints, Child ......................... 67
Restraints, Infant ......................... 68
Reverse Lights .......................... 424
Rotation, Tires ..........................313
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ................. 79
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ............... 80
Safety Defects, Reporting .................. 446
Safety Information, Tire ...................294
Safety Tips ............................. 78
Satellite Radio ...............222,223,225,227,234
Satellite Radio Antenna ................... 235
Schedule, Maintenance .................... 434
Seat Belt Maintenance ..................... 411
Seat Belt Reminder ....................... 49
Seat Belts
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ..................48
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........ 48
And Pregnant Women ................... 51
Child Restraint ....................... 67,76
Extender ............................. 51
Front Seat .......................... 42,43
Operating Instructions ................... 43
Pretensioners ..........................48
Rear Seat ............................. 42
Reminder ............................173
Untwisting Procedure ....................47
Seat Belts (Sedan) ........................40
Seats .................................121
Adjustment .......................... 121
INDEX 485
10
Cleaning .........................129,409
Head Restraints ....................... 125
Heated ............................. 126
Lumbar Support ....................... 124
Power .............................. 124
Rear Folding ....................... 128,129
Rear Folding (Sedan) ....................162
Reclining ............................123
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................ 18
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........395,430
Selection of Oil ......................... 382
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................... 15
Sentry Key Programming ................... 17
Service Assistance ....................... 443
Service Contract ......................... 445
Service Manuals ........................ 447
Setting the Clock .............193,196,208,224,227
Settings, Personal ........................190
Shoulder Belts ........................... 42
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) .......... 255
Signals, Turn ........................... 424
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ...............291
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................312
Snow Tires ............................312
Sound Systems (Radio) ................. 222,225
Spare Tire ..........................307,356
Spark Plugs ............................385
Specifications
Oil ................................382
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...........141,176
Speedometer ........................... 172
Starting ............................... 264
Engine Fails to Start ....................266
Starting Procedures ......................264
Steering
Linkage .............................392
Power ........................... 290,391
TiltColumn ..........................140
486 INDEX
Wheel, Tilt ...........................140
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ..............................238
Storage ............................162,417
Storage, Vehicle .........................255
Stuck, Freeing ..........................367
Sun Roof .............................. 151
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........52
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................383
System, Navigation ......................225
Tachometer ............................ 174
Taillights .............................. 424
Telescoping Steering Column ............... 140
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........ 248
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......172,354
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ............... 71
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................ 18
Theft System (Security Alarm) ...............18
Tilt Steering Column .....................140
Time Delay, Headlight .................... 133
Tip Start ..............................266
Tire and Loading Information Placard .........299
Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............. 298
Tire Markings ..........................294
Tire Safety Information .................... 294
Tires ............................80,303,449
Aging(LifeofTires) ....................309
Air Pressure ..........................303
Alignment ...........................312
Chains ..............................312
Changing ............................356
Compact Spare ........................ 307
Flat Changing ........................ 363
General Information .................... 303
High Speed ..........................305
Inflation Pressures .....................304
Jacking .............................356
INDEX 487
10
LifeofTires .......................... 309
Load Capacity ..................... 299,300
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...........314
Quality Grading ....................... 449
Radial .............................. 306
Replacement ......................... 310
Rotation .............................313
Safety ........................... 294,303
Sizes ...............................296
Snow Tires ........................... 312
Spare Tire ........................... 356
Spinning ............................308
Tread Wear Indicators ................... 309
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............342
Towing ............................... 338
24-Hour Towing Assistance ...............102
Disabled Vehicle ....................... 368
Guide ..............................341
Recreational ....................... 349,369
Weight .............................. 341
Towing Assistance ....................... 102
Traction ..............................292
TrailerTowing ..........................338
Cooling System Tips .................... 349
Hitches ............................. 340
Minimum Requirements .................343
Trailer and Tongue Weight ................342
Wiring ..............................346
TrailerTowingGuide .....................341
TrailerWeight ..........................341
Transaxle .............................270
Additives ............................ 405
Automatic .................... 13,264,270,403
Autostick ............................ 275
Filter ............................... 405
Maintenance ..........................403
Operation ........................... 270
Overdrive ........................... 274
488 INDEX
Selection of Lubricant ................... 432
Transmission
Range Indicator ....................... 174
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 144
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................25
Transporting Pets ........................ 77
Tread Wear Indicators ....................309
Trip Odometer ..........................174
Trip Odometer Reset Button ................ 176
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ...................... 38
Trunk Release, Emergency ................39,40
Trunk Release Remote Control ...............38
Turn Signals ...................... 135,179,424
UCI Connector .........................229
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ........... 89,225
Understanding Your Instrument Panel ......... 169
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................ 449
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 229
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port ........... 222,225
Universal Transmitter ..................... 144
Unleaded Gasoline .......................323
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .............. 47
Upholstery Care ........................408
USB Port ...........................222,225
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses .................400
VanityMirrors...........................89
Variance, Compass .......................189
Vehicle Certification Label ................. 335
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............ 6
Vehicle Loading ...................300,335,337
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .............. 7
Vehicle Storage ....................... 255,417
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .......... 18
INDEX 489
10
Video Entertainment System
(Rear Seat Video System) ..................240
Viscosity, Engine Oil ...................... 383
Voice Recognition System (VR) .............. 116
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) .............172
Warnings and Cautions ..................... 6
Warranty Information .....................446
Washer, Adding Fluid ..................140,393
Washers, Windshield ................ 136,140,393
Washing Vehicle ......................... 407
Water
Driving Through ...................... 292
Wheel Alignment and Balance ............... 312
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................408
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................408
Wheel Bearings .........................406
WindBuffeting .......................38,153
Window Fogging ........................ 255
Windows ..............................34
Power ............................... 34
Windshield Defroster ............... 245,246,252
Windshield Washers ................... 136,140
Fluid ...............................393
Windshield Wiper Blades .................. 392
Windshield Wipers .......................136
Wiper Blade Replacement ...............392,393
Wipers, Intermittent ...................... 138
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure ...... 409
490 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Sebring
OWNER’S MANUAL
2008
2008 Sebring
81-026-0804 Second Edition Printed in U.S.A.
